SPECTRIAN CORP /CA/
10-K, 1998-05-21
RADIO & TV BROADCASTING & COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Previous: TECHNICAL CHEMICALS & PRODUCTS INC, 8-K, 1998-05-21
Next: COMMUNITY MEDICAL TRANSPORT INC, 8-K, 1998-05-21




                                  UNITED STATES
                       SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                             Washington, D.C. 20549


                                   FORM 10-K

[X]  Annual report  pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the  Securities  Exchange
     Act of 1934 for the fiscal year ended March 31, 1998 or

[ ]  Transition  report  pursuant  to  Section  13 or  15(d)  of the  Securities
     Exchange  Act of 1934 for the  transition  period from  _______________  to
     _______________.


                        Commission file number: 0-24360


                              SPECTRIAN CORPORATION
             (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

           Delaware                                      77-0023003
(State or other jurisdiction of          (I.R.S. Employer Identification Number)
 incorporation or organization)


350 West Java Drive, Sunnyvale, California                 94089
 (Address of principal executive office)                (Zip Code)


       Registrant's telephone number, including area code: (408) 745-5400

           Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:


                                                          Name of each exchange
 Title of each class                                        on which registered
 -------------------                                        -------------------
      None                                                         None


           Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:
                          Common Stock, $.001 par value
             Series A Participating Preferred Stock, $.001 par value


     Indicate  by check mark  whether the  registrant  (1) has filed all reports
required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the  Securities  Exchange  Act of
1934  during  the  preceding  12 months  (or for such  shorter  period  that the
registrant was required to file such reports),  and (2) has been subject to such
filing requirements for the past 90 days.

                                Yes  X    No
                                    ---      ---

     Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent  filers pursuant to Item
405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the
best  of  the  registrant's   knowledge,  in  definitive  proxy  or  information
statements  incorporated  by  reference  in Part  III of this  Form  10-K or any
amendment  to this Form 10-K.  [X]

     The aggregate  market value of the voting stock held by  non-affiliates  of
the registrant, based upon the closing sale price of the Common Stock on May 18,
1998 as reported on the Nasdaq National Market, was approximately  $124,769,768.
Shares of Common  Stock held by each officer and director and by each person who
owns 5% or more of the outstanding  Common Stock have been excluded in that such
persons may be deemed to be affiliates.  This  determination of affiliate status
is not necessarily a conclusive determination for other purposes.

     As of May 18, 1998, registrant had outstanding  10,907,605 shares of Common
Stock.


                       DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

     The Registrant has  incorporated  by reference into Part III of this Annual
Report on Form 10-K portions of its Proxy  Statement for the 1998 Annual Meeting
of Stockholders to be held June 26, 1998.


<PAGE>


                                     PART I

ITEM 1. BUSINESS

     This Annual Report on Form 10-K,  the exhibits  hereto and the  information
incorporated by reference herein contain "forward looking statements" within the
meaning  of  Section  27A of  the  Securities  Act  of  1933,  as  amended  (the
"Securities  Act") and Section 21E of the  Securities  Exchange Act of 1934,  as
amended (the "Exchange Act"), and such forward looking  statements involve risks
and uncertainties. When used in this Report, the words "expects," "anticipates,"
and "estimates" and similar expressions are intended to identify forward looking
statements.  Such statements are subject to risks and  uncertainties  that could
cause actual results to differ materially from those projected.  These risks and
uncertainties include those discussed below and those discussed in "Management's
Discussion  and Analysis of Financial  Condition and Results of  Operations"  or
documents incorporated by reference herein.  Spectrian Corporation undertakes no
obligation to publicly release any revisions to these forward looking statements
to reflect events or circumstances  after the date this Report is filed with the
Securities and Exchange Commission or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated
events.

     Spectrian Corporation (the "Company" or "Spectrian") designs,  manufactures
and markets highly linear radio frequency  ("RF") power  amplifiers that address
the needs of wireless  infrastructure  original equipment manufacturers ("OEMs")
and  their  service  provider  customers.  The  Company's  amplifiers  have been
deployed  in  wireless  networks  in over 35  countries  worldwide.  Spectrian's
amplifiers  deliver high  linearity,  are  cost-effectively  produced in volume,
support multiple transmission  standards and demonstrate high field reliability.
These  attributes  enable  service  providers  to  improve  spectrum  efficiency
resulting in reduced cost per subscriber,  to rapidly deploy new services and to
offer enhanced quality and reliability of service.

Industry Background

     The market for  cellular,  personal  communications  services  ("PCS")  and
wireless  local loop  ("WLL")  communications  services  (collectively  known as
"wireless" services) has grown significantly  during the past decade,  fueled by
decreasing   prices  for  wireless   handsets,   a  more  favorable   regulatory
environment,  increasing  competition  among  service  providers  and a  greater
availability  of services  and RF  spectrum.  In  addition,  several  developing
countries  are  installing  wireless  telephone  networks as an  alternative  to
installing,  expanding  or upgrading  traditional  wireline  networks.  Emerging
bidirectional  wireless data  applications  have the potential to further expand
the market for wireless communications by allowing service providers to increase
revenue generating traffic on their networks. The Strategis Group estimates that
the number of wireless subscribers  worldwide will grow from 205 million in 1997
to 675 million in 2002.

     The growth in wireless  communications  has required,  and will continue to
require,   substantial   investment  by  service   providers  in  infrastructure
equipment.  The  Yankee  Group  estimates  that  spending  by  wireless  service
providers on infrastructure  equipment was approximately $32 billion in 1997 and
will  rise  to   approximately   $93  billion  in  2002.   A  typical   wireless
communications  system  comprises a  geographic  region  containing  a number of
cells,  each of which  contains  a cell  site (or  "base  station"),  which  are
networked to form a service  provider's  coverage area. Each base station houses
the equipment that receives  incoming  telephone calls from the switching office
of the local wireline  telephone  company and  broadcasts  calls to the wireless
users within the cell. A base station contains a fixed number of RF channels; in
a single carrier system, each separate channel requires a separate  transceiver,
single channel power amplifier and tunable cavity filter,  along with an antenna
to transmit the outgoing  signal to the wireless  telephone  user. Most existing
wireless  systems  use single  channel  power  amplifiers.  The power  amplifier
receives a relatively weak signal from the transceiver and significantly  boosts
the power of that signal so that it can be broadcast  throughout the cell, which
typically  covers a  geographic  area up to five miles in  radius.  The RF power
levels necessary to transmit the signal over the required range must be achieved
without distorting the modulation characteristics of the signal.

     Traditional  cellular  systems are  capable of  carrying  only one call per
channel of spectrum and are based on analog technology. This limitation combined
with the continuing growth of the wireless communications market has resulted in
the crowding of transmissions within the available RF spectrum.

                                        1

<PAGE>


Because the radio  frequencies  assigned  to  transmissions  are fixed,  service
providers  are seeking new methods to use the RF spectrum  more  efficiently  to
increase capacity. Analog systems are being supplanted by digital systems, which
convert voice transmissions into bits of electronic  information and thereby use
the finite RF spectrum  allocated  to wireless  transmissions  to serve  growing
demand. Three dominant digital transmission  modulation formats have emerged for
cellular  and PCS  networks  that are  known as Time  Division  Multiple  Access
("TDMA"),  Code Division  Multiple  Access ("CDMA") and Global System for Mobile
Communication  ("GSM").  These  transmission  modulation formats allow a digital
network  to have a call  capacity  of three to eight  times the  number of voice
conversations as an analog network. Existing analog cellular networks are in the
process of upgrading to digital formats that operate at frequencies  between 800
MHZ and 1000 MHZ, and new digital cellular networks are being constructed around
the world as new  licenses  are being  awarded.  In  addition  to the  growth in
digital cellular networks, 1997 was a year of significant growth for new digital
PCS networks that may be more desirable to wireless service  providers,  because
such  networks  also allow a higher  volume of calls in a given RF spectrum than
analog  cellular  networks.  PCS  networks  operate  in the 1800 MHZ to 2000 MHZ
frequency range but typically have a smaller coverage area per base station than
their cellular  counterparts.  Thus PCS networks need two to three times as many
base stations  (and power  amplifiers)  as digital  cellular  networks.  Service
providers are upgrading their cellular networks to digital and deploying new PCS
networks,   trends  which  the  Company  believes  will  increase  rapidly.  The
implementation  of digital and PCS networks,  in conjunction  with the continued
growth in analog  networks,  has  resulted  in an  increased  demand for network
infrastructure equipment.

     Wireless  carriers  are also  increasing  system  capacity by  implementing
dynamic channel  allocation,  which allows the service provider to automatically
move available unused channels from less active base stations to busier adjacent
base  stations  as the demand load moves,  such as during  commuter  rush hours.
Systems  with  dynamic  channel  allocation  are more  easily  implemented  with
multicarrier power amplifiers,  which can simultaneously broadcast signals using
multiple transmission  standards over a variable number of channels. The need to
increase system  capacity,  combined with the development of multicarrier  power
amplifiers, has also encouraged wireless carriers to transition from "macrocell"
base stations (which typically have a five mile radius) to microcells.  When the
number  of  subscribers  within  the  macrocell  exceeds  the  capacity  of  its
equipment,  the cell can be split into  several  smaller  microcells  to avoid a
degradation in service.  The geographic range of these microcells is smaller and
requires  equipment  that consumes less power and is less expensive at each base
station,  but more  microcells are required in order to increase the capacity of
the overall system.

     Wireless  carriers'  ability to more  effectively  manage  scarce  spectrum
resources and  accommodate a larger number of  subscribers is dependent on their
ability to broadcast signals with high  "linearity."  Linearity is the degree to
which amplified signals remain within their prescribed band of the spectrum with
low distortion or interference from adjacent channels.  In current systems,  the
RF power  amplifier  is generally  the source of the  greatest  amount of signal
distortion.  Consequently,  obtaining RF power amplifiers with high linearity is
critical  to a service  provider's  ability  to reduce  interference  levels and
thereby increase system capacity.  For example,  higher linearity amplifiers are
required as the industry transitions from analog to digital technologies without
significant  improvements in power amplifier linearity relative to that required
for analog  networks.  Multiple  conversations on a single channel would lead to
unacceptable  channel  interference.  Consequently,  high linearity is even more
critical  in  digital  networks  than in  analog  networks.  Multicarrier  power
amplifiers,  which are  critical to the use of dynamic  channel  allocation  and
microcells,  require  leading edge  linearity  technology to function  properly.
Substantial  investment  and  technical  expertise  are  required  to design and
manufacture RF power amplifiers with high linearity.

     Wireless  service  providers  compete in dynamic markets  characterized  by
evolving and competing industry  standards,  technologies and applications,  and
those  wireless  service  providers that are able to increase the efficiency and
lower  the cost of new and  existing  systems  will  compete  most  effectively.
Wireless  service  providers must  anticipate  evolving  industry  standards and
invest  in  infrastructure  equipment  that  both  maximizes  efficiency  in the
management of the limited  spectrum  licensed to them and is available in volume
for rapid deployment.

                                        2

<PAGE>


     Service providers obtain their equipment from a concentrated group of large
OEMs. The Company believes that Lucent Technologies,  Inc. ("Lucent"),  Ericsson
Telephone Company  ("Ericsson"),  Motorola  Corporation  ("Motorola"),  Northern
Telecom  Limited  ("Northern  Telecom"),  Nortel Matra  Communications  ("Nortel
Matra"),  in  which  Northern  Telecom  has an  equity  interest,  and  Nokia OY
("Nokia") supplied over 80% of the wireless  infrastructure  equipment installed
worldwide  in 1997.  Most of these  OEMs  manufacture  base  station  components
internally.   However,  in  response  to  competition  and  as  the  performance
requirements of certain  components  increase,  many of these OEMs have begun to
rely on  independent  sources  for  certain  system  components,  such as  power
amplifiers,  that  must  meet  unique  technical  requirements.  To  succeed  in
capturing orders from these OEMs,  power amplifier  suppliers must rapidly bring
to  market  products  that  are  highly  linear,   can  be  produced  in  volume
cost-effectively, support multiple standards and are reliable in the field.

The Spectrian Solution

     Spectrian  Corporation  designs,  manufactures and markets highly linear RF
power  amplifiers  that  address the needs of wireless  infrastructure  OEMs and
their service provider customers.  The Company's  amplifiers provide significant
advantages to its customers, including:

     High  Linearity.   Spectrian  has  developed  the  multiple   technological
competencies  and  disciplines   required  to  achieve  high  linearity  in  its
amplifiers.   These  competencies  and  disciplines   include  RF  semiconductor
technology, solid state device physics, thermal and mechanical packaging design,
advanced circuit design,  amplifier  linear  correction  technologies,  advanced
signal  processing  techniques,  control  systems and computer  aided design and
modeling.  The  Company  believes  that its  combined  strengths  in these areas
provide it with an important competitive advantage in maintaining  technological
leadership.  The high degree of linearity of the  Company's  amplifiers  enables
Spectrian's  OEM  customers  to furnish  wireless  service  providers  with high
capacity base station equipment at low capital cost per subscriber.

     Rapid Time to Market and Volume Manufacturing.  The vertical integration of
Spectrian's  design and  production  processes is a key element of the Company's
ability to address wireless  infrastructure  equipment  suppliers'  quantity and
time to market  requirements  for power  amplification  products.  The Company's
ability to design and manufacture its RF semiconductors  in-house is critical to
rapidly and  cost-effectively  introducing new products that meet OEMs' evolving
needs.  Spectrian also designs its amplifiers to be manufactured in high volumes
at low cost,  which the Company  believes  has been a  competitive  advantage in
securing   orders  from  its  OEM  customers   because  power   amplifiers  have
historically  been difficult to manufacture in high volumes based upon the labor
intensive nature of the  manufacturing  process and the complexities of RF power
technology.  Finally,  the Company's use of automated  testing  reduces  overall
manufacturing  cycle times and enables the Company to deliver products in volume
more rapidly.

     Standards  Independence.   Spectrian's  technologies  support  every  major
wireless  modulation  standard,  and its multicarrier  power amplifiers  support
several  standards  simultaneously.  Certain  of the  Company's  single  carrier
products  support both analog and digital  standards in a dual mode format.  The
Company  believes  that this  breadth of product  functionality  is important to
wireless  service  providers  as  they  upgrade  their  cellular  infrastructure
equipment and  implement  digital  systems in an  environment  characterized  by
evolving industry standards and the proliferation of spectrum allocation.

     High Quality and Reliability.  Spectrian designs its power amplifiers to be
highly reliable in the field.  Spectrian's  integrated  design and manufacturing
processes  are  important  factors  contributing  to its  ability to develop and
produce highly reliable power  amplifiers.  In order to further address customer
requirements for amplifier quality and reliability and to ensure process quality
control,  Spectrian has  implemented a continuous  process  improvement  program
throughout the Company and is ISO 9001 certified.

     Multicarrier  Functionality.  Spectrian develops and supplies  multicarrier
amplifiers  that  integrate  the  functions  of multiple  single  carrier  power
amplifiers into a single smaller unit while simultaneously  eliminating the need
for  cavity  filters.   The  Company  believes  that  the  distortion  reduction
performance  of its  multicarrier  amplifiers  will provide it with an important
competitive  advantage.  The ability of the Company's  multicarrier  products to
combine multiple digital and analog channel schemes enables carriers

                                        3

<PAGE>


to  maintain  backward  compatibility  as  they  add  digital  transmission  and
implement dynamic channel allocation solutions. In addition,  multicarrier units
can potentially  reduce service  providers'  equipment and maintenance costs and
space requirements, thereby facilitating the implementation of microcells.

Spectrian Strategy

     Spectrian's objective is to strengthen its position as the leading merchant
supplier of highly linear power amplifiers to wireless infrastructure  equipment
manufacturers  and  service   providers   worldwide.   The  Company's   strategy
incorporates the following key elements:

     Capitalize on Vertical Integration in Design and Manufacturing. The Company
has  historically  pursued a strategy of vertical  integration of its design and
manufacturing  processes,  from design and development of the  semiconductor die
through  assembly and automated  testing with  proprietary  software and systems
that minimize  manufacturing  cycle times. During fiscal 1998, the Company began
outsourcing  some of its printed circuit board assemblies but continues to exert
control  over  each  of  the  design  and  manufacturing   steps  which  further
contributes  to improved  amplifier  linearity,  shortens the Company's  time to
market,  reduces unit costs and increases quality and reliability.  In addition,
operating a wafer fabrication facility improves the Company's access to a supply
of RF semiconductors  even in periods of high industry demand for semiconductors
and intense competition for wafer fabrication capacity.

     Expand  Relationships  with  Leading  Worldwide  Manufacturers  of Wireless
Infrastructure  Equipment.  The Company has developed relationships with certain
large wireless OEMs,  including  Northern Telecom,  Nortel Matra, LG Information
and Communications Limited ("LGIC") and QUALCOMM Incorporated  ("QUALCOMM"),  as
well as certain emerging  manufacturers  including  Harris,  Tellabs and Watkins
Johnson.  The Company markets its products worldwide,  and as of March 31, 1998,
its power  amplifiers had been  installed in over 35 countries.  In fiscal 1997,
Spectrian also began to establish  direct  relationships  with certain  wireless
service  providers,  allowing  the  Company  to address  previously  unavailable
markets.  The Company's  strategy is to form lasting  customer  relationships by
working  closely  with OEM  customers to develop  insight  into their  amplifier
requirements  and to design specific  products that meet their needs, by rapidly
delivering  product  designs  and  volume  production  and  by  maintaining  the
confidentiality of customer technology.

     Leverage  Product  Platforms to Provide  Rapid Time to Market.  The Company
provides customized or "application specific"  amplification products to address
the  particular  technical  and  time  to  market  requirements  of  each of its
customers. The Company leverages its modular product architecture,  configurable
core  technologies  and  product  platforms,  as well as its  ability  to design
products for all RF modulation  schemes, to rapidly and cost effectively develop
and deliver application specific solutions to its customers.

     Pursue  Standards  and Systems  Independence.  The  Company's  products are
compatible   with   wireless   communications   systems   provided   by  various
infrastructure   suppliers   and  operate   under  every  major   domestic   and
international standard. By pursuing both standards and systems independence, the
Company  believes  that it will  benefit  from  the  continuing  growth  of both
existing and emerging wireless  communications  systems while reducing the risks
associated  with relying on the success of one or a limited number of systems or
existing or emerging industry  standards.  In addition to supporting every major
cellular  standard,  the Company has  developed,  and is  continuing to develop,
products that address the needs of the PCS and WLL markets.

     Strengthen  Leadership  Position in Amplification  Technology.  The Company
intends  to  maintain  and  expand  its  technological  leadership  position  by
continuing  to invest  significant  resources  in research  and  development  of
amplification  technology.  The Company believes that its RF amplifier  research
and  development  team is among the largest and most  skilled in the merchant RF
power amplifier industry. To maintain a technological  leadership position,  the
Company believes that numerous integrated  technical  capabilities are required,
including  semiconductor  design and fabrication,  unique packaging concepts and
components,  customized  linearization and correction technologies and expert RF
circuit  design.  The  Company's  strategy is to continue to invest  significant
resources to support the Company's technology leadership in amplifier linearity,
power and efficiency.

                                        4

<PAGE>


Markets

     Wireless systems have historically  employed analog  transmission  formats,
certain  of  which  have  been  adopted  as  industry  standards.  The  need  to
accommodate a growing wireless  customer base within a finite amount of spectrum
has, however, encouraged a worldwide transition from analog standards to various
digital  technologies  which are  significantly  more efficient.  Current analog
standards  include  Advanced Mobile Phone Services  ("AMPS") in the Americas and
Total Access  Communications System ("TACS") and Nordic Mobile Telephone ("NMT")
in Europe.  Current  digital  standards  include TDMA,  CDMA,  Personal  Digital
Cellular ("PDC") in Japan and GSM.

     The  Company  offers  amplifiers  that  support  the AMPS  and TACS  analog
standards and the TDMA, CDMA and GSM digital standards for cellular systems. The
Company has elected not to support the NMT analog standard in Europe, because it
believes  that  NMT  has a lower  potential  for  growth  than  the GSM  digital
standard.  To  date,  the  Company  has  not  invested  significant  development
resources to incorporate  the PDC standard into its product  offerings,  because
such  standard  has not  developed  to any great  degree  outside of Japan.  See
"Management's  Discussion  and  Analysis of Financial  Condition  and Results of
Operations--Factors  Affecting  Future  Operating  Results--Rapid  Technological
Change; Evolving Industry Standards; Dependence on New Products."

     In addition to the analog and digital cellular systems discussed above, the
market for PCS systems is expanding rapidly. The FCC has reallocated spectrum in
the 1.85 to 1.99 gigahertz  range for the provision of PCS and has conducted six
rounds of  auctions  for the PCS  spectrum.  The  success  of PCS as a  wireless
service will depend in part on whether infrastructure  manufacturers and service
providers  can  reduce  system   manufacturing  and  service  costs  and  prices
sufficiently  to  increase  significantly  the  rate of  market  penetration  of
potential subscribers.

     The following chart illustrates these existing and developing standards for
wireless  communications,  and the shaded  areas  represent  markets  served and
standards supported by the Company's current product offerings.


- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       Major Wireless Standards by Region
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Americas           Europe          Asia Pacific      Japan
                  (MHZ)             (MHZ)              (MHZ)          (MHZ)
             -------------------------------------------------------------------
 Analog        AMPS (800)       NMT (450, 900)     NMT (450, 900)   NTT (800)
 Cellular                        TACS (900)         AMPS (800)     JTACS (800)
                                 AMPS (800)         TACS (900)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Digital       CDMA (800)        GSM (900)        CDMA (800, 900)   PDC (1500)
 Cellular      TDMA (800)                           GSM (900)       JDC (800)
                                                  TDMA (450, 800)   CDMA (800)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 PCS           CDMA (1900)       GSM (1800)         CDMA (1900)     PHS (1900)
               TDMA (1900)                          GSM (1800)
               GSM (1900)                           CDMA (1800)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------


     The Company  believes  that the potential  for wireless  communications  in
countries  without  reliable or extensive  wireline  systems may be even greater
than  in  countries  with  developed  telecommunications  systems.  The  cost of
building and  maintaining a wireless  network is generally less than the cost of
building and  maintaining  a comparable  wireline  network.  Thus,  in many less
developed  countries,  wireless service may provide the primary service platform
for both mobile and fixed  telecommunications.  In  addition,  if  technological
advances and price  decreases  continue to occur,  a market in the United States
and other  developed  countries for wireless  service to be used in  conjunction
with, or in place of, traditional wireline ("local loop") service may emerge for
a variety of  applications.  For example,  WLL networks could provide local loop
service and direct access to the long distance carriers.

                                       5

<PAGE>


Products

     The Company  designs  highly  linear  amplifiers  that address the specific
requirements of each of its OEM customers.  The Company's product strategy is to
support multiple wireless systems and standards.  Most existing wireless systems
use single  carrier power  amplifiers.  The following  table  provides a list of
standards for which the Company develops single carrier amplifiers:


              ---------------------------------------------------
                Spectrian Single Carrier Amplifier Configurations
              ---------------------------------------------------
                                           Frequency      Power
                        Standard             (MHZ)       (Watts)
              ---------------------------------------------------
              Analog Cellular:
                AMPS, CDPD                 869-894        45,65
                TACS                       917-950         65
              ---------------------------------------------------
              Digital Cellular:
                TDMA                       485-495         50
                TDMA                       869-894        25,50
                CDMA                       869-894         25
                GSM                        925-960         30
              ---------------------------------------------------
              PCS:
                GSM 1800                  1805-1880        30
                CDMA                      1930-1990       20,25
                GSM 1900                  1930-1990        30
                CDMA                      1805-1870        25
              ---------------------------------------------------
              WLL:
                Wideband CDMA             2370-2400     10,20,40
              ---------------------------------------------------


     The Company also offers  multicarrier  application  specific  amplification
products.  Multicarrier power amplifiers require  significantly higher linearity
than  single  carrier  designs.  The  following  table  provides  a list  of the
standards for which the Company develops multicarrier amplifiers:


     ---------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Spectrian Multicarrier Amplifier Configurations
     ---------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Typical
                                       Frequency      Power      Linearity
                 Standard                (MHZ)       (Watts)      (dBc)*
     -------------------------------- -----------   ---------   ----------
             AMPS, TDMA, CDMA, CDPD    869-894       30-175        -70
             ETACS                     917-950         25          -50
             CDMA                     1805-1870      25-100        -65
     ---------------------------------------------------------------------


- ------------
*Carrier to Intermodulation Distortion Ratio.

     The Company's  amplifiers  can be configured as either  modules or pallets,
separate  plug-in  amplifier  units or integrated  subsystems and range in price
from  approximately  $500 to $30,000.  A pallet  represents  the lowest level of
amplifier  complexity  and  consists of RF  semiconductors  mounted on a printed
circuit board  without a housing.  A plug-in  amplifier  unit consists of a cast
housing,  which provides for thermal management and low cost of production,  and
contains a RF amplifier pallet combined with a digital control interface module.
A power amplifier  subsystem  consists of multiple cast housings and adds signal
processing to enhance linearity. The Company's products are integrated into base
station systems designed and/or manufactured by its OEM customers, and therefore
must be engineered to be com-patible with industry standards, as well as certain
customer specifications including frequency, power and linearity.

OEM Customers, Sales and Marketing

     The Company  sells power  amplifiers  to a limited  number of OEMs in North
America, Europe and Asia principally through its direct sales organization.  The
Company's customers include many of the

                                        6

<PAGE>


world's largest manufacturers of wireless  infrastructure  equipment,  including
Northern Telecom, Nortel Matra, LGIC and QUALCOMM.  During fiscal 1998, Northern
Telecom,  Nortel Matra and LGIC accounted for approximately  57%, 22% and 14% of
revenues,  respectively.  During fiscal 1997,  Northern Telecom and Nortel Matra
accounted for approximately 63% and 12% of revenues, respectively. During fiscal
1996,  Northern Telecom and Nortel Matra accounted for approximately 58% and 17%
of revenues,  respectively. While Northern Telecom continues to be the Company's
dominant customer due to Northern Telecom's growth and diversification  into new
markets,  the products the Company  supplies to Northern Telecom and the regions
in which they are deployed  have become more diverse.  The Company  expects that
sales of its products will continue to be concentrated among a limited number of
customers.  In  addition,  the recent  financial  market  turmoil  and  economic
downturn in Korea may have a material  adverse effect on the Company's  sales of
its products to LGIC, an OEM based in Korea, because a majority of the Company's
products  ordered  by LGIC to date  relate to the  build-out  of the  Korean PCS
system. In addition,  because the Company's products are priced in U.S. dollars,
the currency  instability  in the Korean and other Asian  financial  markets may
have the effect of making the  Company's  products  more  expensive to LGIC than
those of other  manufacturers  whose  products are priced in one of the affected
Asian  currencies,  and,  therefore,  LGIC may reduce  future  purchases  of the
Company's products.  In addition,  wireless  infrastructure OEMs have come under
increasing  price pressure from wireless  service  providers,  which in turn has
resulted in downward pricing pressure on the Company's products.  Therefore, the
Company expects to incur  increasing  price pressures from Northern  Telecom and
its other major OEM customers in future  periods which could result in declining
average  sales  prices  for the  Company's  products.  The  Company's  business,
financial  condition and results of operations  have been  materially  adversely
affected in the past by the failure of anticipated  orders to materialize and by
deferrals or  cancellations  of orders by its customers.  If the Company were to
lose Northern Telecom or any other major customer as a customer, or if orders by
Northern Telecom or any other major OEM customer were to otherwise decrease, the
Company's  business,  financial  condition  and results of  operations  would be
materially  adversely  affected.  See  "Management's  Discussion and Analysis of
Financial  Condition  and  Results  of   Operations--Factors   Affecting  Future
Operating Results--Customer Concentration; Dependence on Northern Telecom."

     The Company employs a customer focused, team based direct sales approach to
satisfy  the  power  amplification  needs of its  customers.  Sales to large OEM
customers   require   close  account   management   by  Company   personnel  and
relationships  at multiple  levels of its  customers'  organizations,  including
management,  engineering and purchasing  personnel.  In addition,  the Company's
application specific  amplification products require experienced sales personnel
to match the  customer's  amplification  requirements  to the Company's  product
capabilities.  The Company believes that close technical  collaboration with the
customer during the design phase of new communications  equipment is critical to
the  integration  of its  amplification  products  into the new  equipment.  The
Company's  integrated  sales  approach  involves a team  consisting  of a senior
account  manager,  a program  manager and members of the  Company's  engineering
department.  This sales approach allows the Company's  engineering  personnel to
work closely with their counterparts at the OEM customer to assure compliance of
the product to the customer's  specification.  The Company's  executive officers
are also involved in all aspects of the Company's  relationships  with its major
customers and work closely with their senior  management.  As of March 31, 1998,
the Company had a direct sales staff of six people. The Company warrants its new
products against defects in design,  materials and workmanship,  typically for a
period of 12 to 18 months.

     As part of the effort to  diversify  its product  base,  in fiscal 1997 the
Company began to sell  multicarrier  amplifier  systems  (including  filters and
combiners)  directly  to service  providers.  To date,  these sales have been to
providers in the United  States and Israel.  The Company  recognizes  that these
sales may be in conflict  with  potential or current OEM sales and is willing to
work with its OEM equipment  suppliers so that the service  provider  receives a
Spectrian  power  amplifier  system directly or through the OEM. There can be no
assurance  that the Company's  direct sales to service  providers will not cause
its OEM  equipment  suppliers to reduce orders or terminate  their  relationship
with the  Company.  Any such  reduction  or  termination  could  have a material
adverse effect on the Company's business, financial condition and

                                        7

<PAGE>


results of operations.  See  "Management's  Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition  and  Results  of   Operations--Factors   Affecting  Future  Operating
Results--Customer Concentration; Dependence on Northern Telecom."

     The  Company   markets  its  products   overseas  with  the  assistance  of
independent sales representatives in various parts of the world. The Company has
one  independent  sales   representative  in  the  United  States,  three  sales
representatives in Europe covering Austria,  Finland,  France,  Germany,  Italy,
Sweden and Switzerland,  one sales representative dedicated to each of Japan and
Israel  and  a   representative   organization  in  South  Korea.   The  Company
continuously  evaluates  whether to establish  direct sales forces or to utilize
independent  representatives  in a  particular  region or for a given  potential
customer  depending  upon  the  scope  of  potential  sales  opportunities.  The
Company's  direct  sales  staff  provides  sales  direction  and  support to its
international  sales  representatives.   Sales  outside  of  the  United  States
represented 95%, 73% and 72% of revenues in fiscal 1998,  fiscal 1997 and fiscal
1996,  respectively.  Sales outside of the United States are denominated in U.S.
dollars in order to reduce the risks associated with the fluctuations of foreign
currency  exchange  rates.  The Company  expects that  international  sales will
continue to account for a significant portion of its revenues.  Sales outside of
the  United  States  involve  a number  of  inherent  risks,  including  reduced
protection for  intellectual  property rights in some  countries,  the impact of
recessionary  environments  in economies  outside the United  States,  generally
longer  receivables   collection  periods,   unexpected  changes  in  regulatory
requirements,   tariffs  and  other  trade   barriers.   In  addition,   because
substantially  all of the  Company's  foreign  sales  are  denominated  in  U.S.
dollars,  increases  in the value of the dollar  relative to the local  currency
would increase the price of the Company's  products in foreign  markets and make
the Company's products relatively more expensive and less price competitive than
competitors'  products  that are  priced  in local  currencies.  There can be no
assurance  that these  factors  will not have a material  adverse  effect on the
Company's  future  international  sales  and,  consequently,  on  the  Company's
business, financial condition and results of operations. The Company anticipates
that the recent turmoil in Asian financial markets and the recent  deterioration
of the  underlying  economic  conditions in certain Asian  countries may have an
impact on its sales to customers located in or whose projects are based in those
countries due to the impact of currency  fluctuations  on the relative  price of
the Company's  products and  restrictions on government  spending imposed by the
International  Monetary Fund (the "IMF") on those countries  receiving the IMF's
assistance. In addition, customers in those countries may face reduced access to
working capital to fund component purchases, such as the Company's products, due
to higher interest rates,  reduced bank lending due to contractions in the money
supply or the deterioration in the customer's or its bank's financial  condition
or the inability to access local equity financing. A substantial majority of the
Company's  products are sold to OEMs who incorporate the Company's products into
systems sold and installed to end-user customers. These OEMs are not required by
contract and do not typically provide the Company with information regarding the
location and identity of their end-user customers,  and, therefore,  the Company
is not able to determine  what portion of its product  sales have been or future
orders will be incorporated into OEM sales to end-users in those Asian countries
currently experiencing financial market turmoil and/or deterioration of economic
conditions. Furthermore, a large portion of the Company's existing customers and
potential new customers are servicing new markets in developing  countries  that
the Company's customers expect will deploy wireless communication networks as an
alternative to the construction of a wireline infrastructure.  If such countries
decline to construct  wireless  communication  systems,  or construction of such
systems is delayed for any reason,  including  business and economic  conditions
and changes in economic stability due to factors such as increased inflation and
political  turmoil,  such  delays  could have a material  adverse  effect on the
Company's  business,   results  of  operations  and  financial  condition.   See
"Management's  Discussion  and  Analysis of Financial  Condition  and Results of
Operations--Factors  Affecting Future Operating  Results--Risks of International
Sales."

Manufacturing

     The Company assembles,  tests, packages and ships amplifier products at its
manufacturing  facilities  located  in  Sunnyvale,   California.  The  Company's
manufacturing facilities consist of a 4 inch wafer fabrication and semiconductor
assembly and test facility and an amplifier assembly and test facility. The

                                        8

<PAGE>


Company's manufacturing product engineering group, comprised of 37 engineers, is
devoted to improving product  manufacturability  by minimizing assembly and test
cycle times,  improving  product test yields and reducing overall  manufacturing
costs.

     Wafer  Fabrication.  As part of its strategy of vertical  integration,  the
Company operates its own wafer fabrication facility for the production of the RF
semiconductor,   the  most  important   component   utilized  in  the  Company's
amplifiers.  The Company has an eight person  semiconductor  process engineering
group  responsible for continuous  improvement of semiconductor  processes.  The
Company believes that control of the semiconductor  manufacturing process allows
it to reduce unit costs,  control  quality,  improve time to market delivery and
most  importantly  increase the linearity of the RF  semiconductors  used in its
amplifiers.

     The Company's operation of its manufacturing facilities entails a number of
risks,  including a high level of fixed and variable  costs,  the  management of
complex  processes,  dependence  on a  single  source  of  supply  and a  strict
regulatory  environment.  Fixed costs  consist  primarily  of  occupancy  costs,
investment in  manufacturing  equipment,  repair,  maintenance and  depreciation
costs related to equipment and fixed labor costs  related to  manufacturing  and
process engineering.  During periods of low demand, high fixed wafer fabrication
costs are likely to have a material  adverse effect on the Company's  results of
operations.

     The Company's strategy of frequently  introducing and rapidly expanding the
manufacture  of new products to meet evolving OEM customer and service  provider
needs has caused the Company to  experience  high  materials  and  manufacturing
costs,   including  high  scrap  and  material   waste,   significant   material
obsolescence,  labor inefficiencies and overtime expenses,  inefficient material
procurement  and  an  inability  to  realize  economies  of  scale.  These  high
manufacturing  costs and production  interruptions have had an adverse effect on
the  Company's  results of  operations.  In  addition,  the Company has made and
expects to continue to make pricing commitments to OEM customers in anticipation
of achieving such  manufacturing  cost  reductions.  Any failure to achieve such
manufacturing  cost  reductions  could  have a  material  adverse  effect on the
Company's business, financial condition and results of operations.

     The design and  fabrication of RF  semiconductors  is a complex and precise
process. Such manufacturing is sensitive to a wide variety of factors, including
variations and impurities in the raw materials,  difficulties in the fabrication
process,  performance of the manufacturing equipment,  defects in the masks used
to print circuits on a wafer and the level of contaminants in the  manufacturing
environment. As a result of these and other factors, semiconductor manufacturing
yields  from  time  to time in the  past  have  suffered,  and  there  can be no
assurance that the Company will be able to achieve acceptable  production yields
in the future. In addition,  the Company's wafer fabrication facility represents
a single point of failure in its manufacturing  process that would be costly and
time-consuming to replace if its operation were interrupted. The interruption of
wafer  fabrication  operations  or the loss of employees  dedicated to the wafer
fabrication  facility  could have a  material  adverse  effect on the  Company's
business, financial condition and results of operations. Any failure to maintain
acceptable wafer production levels, either from the Company's facility or from a
third party wafer supplier, will have a material adverse effect on the Company's
business, financial condition and results of operations.

     The  Company's  operation of its wafer  fabrication  facility  subjects the
Company  to a variety  of  local,  state and  federal  governmental  regulations
relating to the storage, discharge, handling, emission, generation,  manufacture
and disposal of toxic or other  hazardous  substances  used to  manufacture  the
Com-pany's products.  The Company believes that it is currently in compliance in
all  material  respects  with  such  regulations  and that it has  obtained  all
necessary environmental permits to conduct its business. However, the failure to
comply with  current or future  regulations  could result in the  imposition  of
substantial  fines on the Company,  suspension of production,  alteration of its
manufacturing processes or cessation of operations. In addition, compliance with
such  regulations  could  require the Company to acquire  expensive  remediation
equipment or to incur substantial  expenses.  See  "Management's  Discussion and
Analysis of Financial  Condition  and Results of  Operations--Factors  Affecting
Future Operating Results--Risks Associated with Internal Wafer Fabrication."

     The Company expects that its customers will continue to establish demanding
specifications for quality,  performance and reliability that must be met by the
Company's products. RF semiconductors as

                                        9

<PAGE>


complex as those offered by the Company often encounter  development  delays and
may  contain  undetected  defects or  failures  when first  introduced  or after
commencement of commercial  shipments.  The Company has from time to time in the
past experienced product quality,  performance or reliability problems, although
no such problems have had a material  adverse effect on the Company's  business,
financial condition and results of operations.  In addition,  multicarrier power
amplifiers  have a higher  probability of  malfunction  because of their greater
complexity. There can be no assurance that defects or failures will not occur in
the  future  relating  to  the  Company's   product  quality,   performance  and
reliability that may have a material  adverse effect on the Company's  business,
financial  condition  and  results of  operations.  If such  defects or failures
occur,  the Company could  experience lost revenue,  increased costs  (including
warranty  expense,  costs  associated  with  customer  support and other product
liability  related costs),  delays in or cancellations or rescheduling of orders
or  shipments  and  product  returns  or  discounts,  any of which  would have a
material  adverse  effect on the  Company's  business,  financial  condition and
results of operations.  See  "Management's  Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition  and  Results  of   Operations--Factors   Affecting  Future  Operating
Results--Product Quality, Performance and Reliability."

     Semiconductor  Assembly and Test.  Once a wafer is processed,  it is tested
and diced into chips that are attached to a special ceramic package, wire bonded
and  encapsulated.  The packages are designed for optimal thermal and electrical
performance  that are critical  during high power RF operation.  These processes
require  precision for  performance of the  semiconductor  to meet the Company's
strict standards but must also be suited to manufacturing in large volumes.  The
Company utilizes patented packaging techniques to improve the performance of its
semiconductors and amplifiers as well as the automated  assembly  techniques for
semiconductors.  In addition,  the Company utilizes a specialized  surface mount
packaging  process to improve  transistor  assembly  volume  that also  enhances
thermal performance,  lowers costs and improves  reliability.  See "Management's
Discussion    and   Analysis   of   Financial    Condition    and   Results   of
Operations--Factors Affecting Future Operating Results."

     Amplifier  Assembly  and  Test.  The  Company's   amplifier   manufacturing
activities consist of purchasing  components,  assembling and testing components
and subassemblies,  and integrating  subassemblies  into finished products.  The
Company's  amplifiers are comprised of a variety of subassemblies and components
designed or specified by the Company,  including  housings,  harnesses,  cables,
packaged  RF  semiconductors,  semiconductor  integrated  circuits  and  printed
circuit  boards.  Except  for  the  RF  semiconductors,   these  components  and
subassemblies  are  manufactured by third parties and are shipped to the Company
for final  assembly.  During the third quarter of fiscal 1998, the Company began
outsourcing some of the assembly of its higher volume  components  consisting of
the integration of printed circuit boards and the RF semiconductors manufactured
by the Company on a turnkey basis. Regardless of whether the Company assembles a
component  in house or  relies on a turnkey  contractor,  each of the  Company's
products receives extensive in process and final quality inspections and tests.

     The Company  attempts to utilize  standard  parts and  components  that are
available  from  multiple  vendors.  However,  certain  components  used  in the
Company's products are currently  available only from single sources,  and other
components  are  available  from only a limited  number of sources.  Despite the
risks  associated  with  purchasing  components  from  single  sources or from a
limited number of sources, the Company has made the strategic decision to select
single  source or limited  source  suppliers in order to obtain  lower  pricing,
receive more timely delivery and maintain quality  control.  If the Company were
unable to obtain  sufficient  quantities of components,  delays or reductions in
product  shipments could occur which would have a material adverse effect on the
Company's  business,   financial  condition  and  results  of  operations.   See
"Management's  Discussion  and  Analysis of Financial  Condition  and Results of
Operations--Factors  Affecting Future Operating Results--Sole or Limited Sources
of Materials and Services."

     The  Company  continues  to  initiate  actions to reduce its  manufacturing
costs. The Company has negotiated master purchase agreements with its vendors to
have  substantially  all of its parts bid on an annual  basis  rather  than on a
monthly basis, which it believes has generated significant volume discounts. The
Company is also implementing  standardized automated test processes and material
handling

                                       10

<PAGE>


throughout the manufacturing area which is also designed to reduce costs. In the
third quarter  fiscal 1998,  the Company also began  utilizing the services of a
turnkey  contractor to assemble certain of its high volume printed circuit board
components. There can be no assurance that these activities will reduce costs as
quickly as  anticipated  reductions in average  selling  prices of the Company's
products.  Any failure to achieve continued  manufacturing cost reductions could
have a material adverse effect on the Company's  business,  financial  condition
and  results  of  operations.  See  "Management's  Discussion  and  Analysis  of
Financial  Condition  and  Results  of   Operations--Factors   Affecting  Future
Operating Results--  Fluctuations in Operating Results" and "--Declining Average
Sales Prices."

Research and Development

     The mission of the Company's  research and  development  organization is to
rapidly design low cost, highly manufacturable RF power amplifiers with industry
leading  performance.  The Company's research and development staff is organized
into a  semiconductor  group and an amplifier  group.  The  semiconductor  group
focuses on the rapid  design of RF  semiconductors  that are low cost and highly
efficient  to provide  improved RF  performance.  The  semiconductor  group also
performs  advanced  research  in  device  modeling  and  semiconductor   process
development to support the amplifier  engineering group's efforts. The amplifier
engineering  group focuses on rapid  development of new RF power amplifiers that
are  manufacturable  in high  volumes at low cost and achieve  industry  leading
performance.  This group creates new product  platforms  and leverages  existing
ones,  reuses  existing  circuit  topologies and introduces  into production new
correction, control and amplification concepts created by the group. The Company
uses an automated design  environment to model RF semiconductors and amplifiers.
This  design   environment,   together  with  the  Company's   modular   product
architecture and  configurable  core  technologies,  allow it to rapidly define,
develop and deliver on a timely basis the new and enhanced  products demanded by
its OEM customers.

     The Company has historically devoted a significant portion of its resources
to research  and  development  programs  and expects to continue to do so. As of
March 31, 1998, the Company had 119 people engaged in research and  development.
The Company's research and development  expenses in fiscal 1998, fiscal 1997 and
fiscal 1996 were $18.6 million,  $17.2 million and $14.5 million,  respectively,
and  represented  11%,  19% and 20%,  respectively,  of total  revenues in those
periods.

     The  markets  in  which  the  Company   and  its   customers   compete  are
characterized by rapidly changing  technology,  evolving industry  standards and
continuous  improvements in products and services.  The Company's future success
depends  upon,  among other  things,  its  ability to develop new  products in a
timely manner that compete effectively on the basis of price and performance and
that  adequately  address the needs of its OEM  customers.  No assurance  can be
given that the Company's product  development  efforts will be successful,  that
its new products will achieve  customer  acceptance or that such OEMs'  products
will achieve  customer  acceptance.  In addition,  as is  characteristic  of the
wireless  communications  equipment  industry,  the average  sales prices of the
Company's products have historically  decreased over the products' lives and are
expected to continue to do so. To offset  declining  average sales  prices,  the
Company  believes  that in the  near  term it must  develop  new  products  that
incorporate advanced features and can be sold at higher average sales prices. To
the extent  that new  products  are not  developed  in a timely  manner,  do not
achieve customer  acceptance or do not generate higher sales prices and margins,
the Company's  business,  financial condition and results of operations would be
materially  adversely  affected.  See  "Management's  Discussion and Analysis of
Financial  Condition  and  Results  of   Operations--Factors   Affecting  Future
Operating  Results--Rapid  Technological  Change;  Evolving Industry  Standards;
Dependence on New Products" and "--Declining Average Sales Prices."

Patents and Proprietary Technology

     The Company's  ability to compete  successfully  and achieve future revenue
growth  will  depend,  in  part,  on its  ability  to  protect  its  proprietary
technology and operate without  infringing the rights of others. The Company has
a policy of seeking  patents on inventions  resulting from its ongoing  research
and  development  activities.  The  Company  has been  awarded 16 United  States
patents,  and has 22 United States patent applications  pending,  including five
that have been allowed but not yet formally issued. The

                                       11

<PAGE>


Company also has been awarded  four foreign  patents and has ten foreign  patent
applications  pending.  There can be no  assurance  that the  Company's  pending
patent  applications  will be allowed or that the issued or pending patents will
not be challenged or circumvented by competitors.  Notwithstanding the Company's
active pursuit of patent  protection,  the Company  believes that the success of
its   business   depends   more  on  the   collective   value  of  its  patents,
specifications,  computer aided design and modeling tools,  technical  processes
and employee  expertise.  The Company generally enters into  confidentiality and
nondisclosure  agreements  with its employees,  suppliers,  OEM  customers,  and
potential  customers and limits access to and  distribution  of its  proprietary
technology.  However,  there can be no assurance that such measures will provide
adequate  protection  for the  Company's  trade  secrets  or  other  proprietary
information,  or that the Company's trade secrets or proprietary technology will
not otherwise  become known or be  independently  developed by competitors.  The
failure of the  Company  to  protect  its  proprietary  technology  could have a
material  adverse  effect on its  business,  financial  condition and results of
operations. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and
Results of  Operations--Factors  Affecting Future  Operating  Results--Uncertain
Protection of Intellectual Property."

     The   communications   equipment  industry  is  characterized  by  vigorous
protection and pursuit of intellectual property rights or positions,  which have
resulted in significant and often protracted and expensive litigation.  Although
there is  currently  no pending  intellectual  property  litigation  against the
Company,  the  Company or its  suppliers  may from time to time be  notified  of
claims that the Company may be infringing patents or other intellectual property
rights owned by third parties. If it is necessary or desirable,  the Company may
seek licenses under such patents or other intellectual property rights. However,
there can be no assurance that licenses will be offered or that the terms of any
offered  licenses  will be  acceptable  to the Company.  The failure to obtain a
license  from a third  party for  technology  used by the  Company or  otherwise
secure  rights  to  use  such  technology  could  cause  the  Company  to  incur
substantial  liabilities,  to suspend  the  manufacture  of  products  or expend
significant  resources  to  develop  noninfringing  technology.  There can be no
assurance that the Company would be successful in such  development or that such
licenses  would be available  on  reasonable  terms or a "design  around" is not
practicable,  if at all. In the event that any third  party  makes a  successful
claim  against  either the  Company or its  customers  and a license is not made
available  to the  Company  on  commercially  reasonable  terms,  the  Company's
business,  financial  condition  and results of  operations  would be materially
adversely affected.  Furthermore,  the Company may initiate claims or litigation
against third parties for infringement of the Company's proprietary rights or to
establish the validity of the  Company's  proprietary  rights.  Litigation by or
against  the  Company  could  result in  significant  expense to the Company and
divert the efforts of the Company's technical and management personnel,  whether
or not such litigation results in a favorable  determination for the Company. In
the event of an adverse  result in any such  litigation,  the  Company  could be
required  to  pay  substantial  damages,  indemnify  its  customers,  cease  the
manufacture,  use and sale of infringing products,  expend significant resources
to develop noninfringing technology, discontinue the use of certain processes or
obtain licenses to the infringing technology.  See "Management's  Discussion and
Analysis of Financial  Condition  and Results of  Operations--Factors  Affecting
Future Operating Results--Risk of Third Party Claims of Infringement."

Competition

     The wireless communications equipment industry is extremely competitive and
is  characterized by rapid  technological  change,  new product  development and
product obsolescence,  evolving industry standards and significant price erosion
over the life of a product.  The ability of the Company to compete  successfully
and  sustain  profitability  depends  in part upon the  rates at which  wireless
equipment  OEMs  incorporate  the Company's  products into their systems and the
Company captures market share from other merchant suppliers. The Company's major
OEM customers,  including  Northern  Telecom,  Nortel Matra,  LGIC and QUALCOMM,
continuously evaluate whether to manufacture their own amplification products or
purchase  them  from  outside  sources  such  as the  Company.  There  can be no
assurance that these OEM customers will incorporate the Company's  products into
their  systems or that in general  they will  continue to rely,  or expand their
reliance,  on  external  sources of supply  for their  power  amplifiers.  These
customers and other large  manufacturers  of wireless  communications  equipment
could also elect

                                       12

<PAGE>


to enter into the merchant market and compete directly with the Company,  and at
least one OEM,  NEC  Corporation  ("NEC")  has already  done so. Such  increased
competition could materially adversely affect the Company's business,  financial
condition and results of operations.  See "Management's  Discussion and Analysis
of  Financial  Condition  and Results of  Operations--Factors  Affecting  Future
Operating  Results--Internal  Amplifier  Design and Production  Capabilities  of
OEMs" and "--Market for the Company's Products is Highly Competitive."

     The   Company's   principal   competitors   in  the  market  for   wireless
amplification  products  provided by merchant  suppliers  currently  include AML
Communications,  Amplidyne,  Hewlett-Packard  Wireless Infrastructure  Division,
M/A-COM (a  subsidiary  of AMP),  Microwave  Power  Devices,  NEC and  Powerwave
Technologies.   Certain  of  these   competitors   have,  and  potential  future
competitors could have, substantially greater technical,  financial,  marketing,
distribution  and other  resources  than the  Company  and have,  or could have,
greater  name   recognition   and  market   acceptance  of  their  products  and
technologies.  No assurance can be given that the Company's competitors will not
develop new  technologies or enhancements to existing  products or introduce new
products that will offer superior price or performance  features compared to the
Company's products.  To the extent that OEMs increase their reliance on external
sources for their power amplification needs, more competitors could be attracted
to the market.  The Company  expects its  competitors  to offer new and existing
products at prices  necessary to gain or retain  market  share.  The Company has
experienced significant price competition,  which has in the past affected gross
margins.  Certain  of  the  Company's  competitors  have  substantial  financial
resources  which may enable them to withstand  sustained  price  competition  or
downturns in the power amplification  market. There can be no assurance that the
Company will not be subject to increased  price  competition or that the Company
will be able to compete successfully in the future. See "Management's Discussion
and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations--Factors Affecting
Future  Operating   Results--Market   for  the  Company's   Products  is  Highly
Competitive."

Backlog

     The Company does not believe that its backlog as of any particular  date is
representative  of  actual  sales  for  any  succeeding  period.  As part of the
Company's close working  relationships with its major customers,  such customers
expect  the  Company to  respond  quickly to changes in the volume and  delivery
schedule of their  amplifiers,  and if necessary,  to inventory  products at the
Company's  facilities for just in time delivery.  Therefore,  although contracts
with such customers typically specify aggregate dollar volumes of products to be
purchased  over an extended  time  period,  such  contracts  also  provide  that
scheduled  shipment  dates of particular  volumes are generally  released to the
Company only a few days or weeks prior to the actual required delivery dates. In
addition, the Company's customers may cancel or defer orders without significant
penalty.

American Microwave Technology, Inc.

     In April 1997,  the Company sold its wholly owned  subsidiary,  AMT, to the
management  group and employees of AMT for  approximately  $4.0 million in cash,
realizing a gain of  approximately  $1.5 million after  disposition of AMT's net
assets.  The  Company  decided  to  divest  AMT,  which  designs,  develops  and
manufactures RF power amplifier  systems for selected  wireless,  scientific and
application  specific  markets,  after  concluding  that AMT's  market focus had
become less  synergistic  with the Company's core  business.  In fiscal 1997 and
fiscal 1996, AMT accounted for  approximately 10% and 7%,  respectively,  of the
Company's revenues.

Employees

     As of March 31, 1998, the Company had a total of 688 regular, temporary and
contract  employees,  including  502  in  manufacturing,  119  in  research  and
development, 26 in sales and 41 in administration.  The Company's future success
will depend, in part, on its ability to continue to attract, retain and motivate
highly  qualified  technical  and  management  personnel.  None of the Company's
employees is  represented  by a  collective  bargaining  agreement,  nor has the
Company experienced any work stoppage.  The Company considers its relations with
its employees to be good.

                                       13

<PAGE>


Year 2000 Compliance

     Many installed  computer programs were written using a two digit date field
rather  than four digit  fields to define the  applicable  year.  Such  computer
programs  utilizing a two digit date  fields may  recognize a date using "00" as
the year 1900 rather than the year 2000 (the "Year 2000  Issue").  The Year 2000
Issue could potentially result in a system failure or in miscalculations causing
disruptions of operations,  including among other things, a temporary  inability
to  process  transactions,  send  invoices  or  engage in other  similar  normal
business  activities.  The Company has identified Year 2000 Issues in certain of
its  internal  operating  systems  and is in the  process  of  installing  a new
computer   software  system  which  will  increase   operational  and  financial
efficiencies  and information  analysis.  The new enterprise  system  recognizes
dates beyond December 31, 1999 and addresses the substantial portion of the Year
2000 Issue that may impact the Company.  The cost of this project, as it relates
to the Year  2000  Issue,  is not  expected  to have a  material  effect  on the
operations of the Company and will be funded through  operating cash flows.  The
Company has not completed an audit of its remaining internal systems or products
with respect to Year 2000 Issues.

Management

     The executive officers of the Company and certain information about them as
of March 31, 1998 are as follows:


          Name            Age                           Position
- -----------------------  -----   ----------------------------------------------
Garrett A. Garrettson     54     President, Chief Executive Officer and Director
Stephen B. Greenspan      56     Executive Vice President of Operations and
                                   Chief Operating Officer
Bruce R. Wright           49     Executive Vice President, Finance and 
                                   Administration, Chief Financial Officer and 
                                   Secretary
Timothy Heyboer           48     Vice President, Amplifier Engineering
David Piazza              34     Vice President, Semiconductor R&D
Joseph M. Veni            46     Senior Vice President, Sales and Marketing
William Zucker            40     Vice President, Marketing


     Garrett A. Garrettson joined the Company in April 1996 as President,  Chief
Executive  Officer and a Director.  Between March 1993 and March 1996, he served
as President and Chief  Executive  Officer of Censtor  Corporation  ("Censtor"),
which designs and sells technology  related to magnetic  recording heads for the
disk drive  industry.  From 1986 to March 1993, he served as a Vice President of
Imprimis  Technology  Incorporated  ("Imprimis"),  a wholly owned  subsidiary of
Control  Data  Corporation,  and  subsequently  as a Vice  President  of Seagate
Technology,  Inc.  ("Seagate")  following its  acquisition  of Imprimis in 1989.
Prior to 1986, Mr.  Garrettson held a variety of positions with  Hewlett-Packard
Company and served in the United States Navy. Mr.  Garrettson also serves on the
Boards of  Directors  of RedLake  Imaging  and Benton  Oil and Gas  Company.  He
received his B.S. and M.S. in  Engineering  Physics and his Ph.D.  in Mechanical
Engineering from Stanford University.

     Stephen B.  Greenspan  joined the  Company  in May 1996 as  Executive  Vice
President of  Operations  and was named Chief  Operating  Officer in April 1997.
From November 1991 to February 1996, he served as Senior Vice President, Quality
and Customer Service at Seagate.  Mr. Greenspan also held a variety of positions
at Seagate including Vice President of Process Development and Vice President of
Domestic and Far East Operations.  From March 1986 to August 1987, Mr. Greenspan
served as Vice President of Operations at Tandon Corporation,  a manufacturer of
personal  computers.  From  1967  to  1986,  Mr.  Greenspan  held a  variety  of
management  positions at IBM Corporation  related to  semiconductor  and circuit
technologies,  personal  computer  manufacturing  and  supplier  management.  He
received his B.S.E.E.  degree from New Jersey  Institute of  Technology  and his
M.S.E.E. degree from Syracuse University.

     Bruce R.  Wright  joined  the  Company  on May 1,  1997 as  Executive  Vice
President of Finance and Administration,  Chief Financial Officer and Secretary.
Prior to joining the Company, he was Chief

                                       14

<PAGE>


Financial  Officer at Tencor  Instruments from December 1991 to April 1997. From
January  1988  to  July  1991,  he was  Chief  Financial  Officer  at  Teknekron
Corporation. Mr. Wright also served with Atlantic Richfield Company and the U.S.
Air Force.  He received  his B.A. in Physics  from Pomona  College,  his B.S. in
Mechanical  Engineering from California  Institute of Technology and his S.M. in
Management from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology ("MIT").

     Tim  Heyboer  joined the Company in 1986 as  Director  of  Engineering  and
served in a variety of departments including product line management and the now
discontinued  military  division.  In August  1996,  Mr.  Heyboer was named Vice
President of Amplifier  Engineering of the Company.  Prior to joining Spectrian,
Mr.  Heyboer  was  employed at Narda  Western  Operations,  a passive  microwave
components  company,  most  recently  as director of  engineering.  Mr.  Heyboer
received  his  B.S.E.E.  degree  and his  M.S.E.E.  degree  from  University  of
Michigan, Ann Arbor.

     David Piazza joined the Company in 1990 as a Project Engineer. In September
1996, Mr. Piazza was named Vice President, Semiconductor R&D for the Company. He
has served in various management positions at the Company, including Director of
Engineering, PCS Amplifier Products, Engineering Manager, Amplifier Products and
Project Engineer. Mr. Piazza received his B.S.E.E. degree from the University of
California at Davis.

     Joseph M. Veni joined the Company in April 1992 as Vice  President of Sales
and in June 1996 was named Senior Vice President, Sales and Marketing. From 1987
to April 1992,  he was Vice  President  of Sales and  Marketing  at  TTI-General
Signal. From 1985 to 1987, Mr. Veni worked at Cushman Electronics, Inc. Prior to
that time,  Mr. Veni was employed by Halcyon  Communications,  Inc.,  ICS Group,
Inc. and Western Union Telegraph Co. in various  marketing and sales  positions.
Mr. Veni received his Associates  Degree in Electronics  Technology from Mt. San
Antonio College.

     William  Zucker  joined the Company in October  1995 as Vice  President  of
Engineering.  In August 1996,  Mr. Zucker became Vice  President of Product Line
Management.  In April 1997, he was named Vice  President of Marketing.  Prior to
joining the Company,  Mr. Zucker held several  positions at AT&T/AT&T Bell Labs,
including  director  of product  management  from July 1994 to October  1995 and
director of development from November 1991 to July 1994. Mr. Zucker received his
B.S.E.E.  degree from Manhattan  College and his S.M. in Electrical  Engineering
from MIT.


ITEM 2. PROPERTIES

     The  Company's  principal  administrative,  engineering  and  manufacturing
facilities are located in two buildings of approximately  141,000 square feet in
Sunnyvale,  California.  In November  1996,  the Company  entered  into  several
agreements in connection  with a transaction  with respect to these  properties.
Pursuant to these agreements, the Company sold these properties to SPEC (CA) QRS
12-20,  Inc.  ("SPEC"),  and  pursuant to the terms of a lease  agreement,  SPEC
agreed to lease these properties to the Company for a term of 15 years (with two
options  to extend  the lease for up to an  additional  ten  years).  This lease
agreement  also  provides that the Company shall have the right of first refusal
to purchase the properties from SPEC upon the occurrence of certain  conditions.
During the first  quarter of fiscal 1999,  the Company  entered  into  operating
leases for an ancillary  40,000 square foot  manufacturing  facility in Rocklin,
California  and a  7,750  square  foot  engineering  design  center  in  Quincy,
Illinois.  The Rocklin  facility has a sixty-two  month term and expires in July
2003, and the Quincy facility has a twelve month term and expires in March 1998.
In March 1997, through means of a limited liability company of which the Company
owns 91.5%, the Company purchased a building of approximately 39,000 square feet
in Sunnyvale,  California located between the Company's two occupied  buildings.
The Company is currently  sharing  occupancy of this building with a third party
to whom it subleases space under month to month lease arrangements.


ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

     Since December 23, 1997, a number of complaints have been filed against the
Company  and  certain of its  officers  in the  Federal  Court for the  Northern
District of California that allege  violations of the federal  securities  laws.
Similar  complaints  have been  filed in  California  state  court  that  allege
violations

                                       15

<PAGE>


of California  state  securities laws and California  common law. The complaints
have been  consolidated  in the  federal  and state  courts,  respectively.  The
plaintiffs in both the federal and state  lawsuits  purport to represent a class
of persons who purchased the Company's  securities during the period of July 17,
1997  through  October  23,  1997.  The  complaints  allege that the Company and
certain of its officers  misled the  investing  public  regarding  the financial
prospects  of the  Company.  The  Company  believes  that  the  allegations  are
completely without merit and will vigorously defend itself.


ITEM 4. SUBMISSION OF MATTERS TO A VOTE OF SECURITY HOLDERS

     Not applicable.


                                     PART II


ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT'S COMMON EQUITY AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS


                      PRICE RANGE OF SPECTRIAN COMMON STOCK

     The Company's  Common Stock has been traded on the Nasdaq  National  Market
under the symbol "SPCT" since August 4, 1994. The following table sets forth for
the period  indicated  the high and low sale  prices for the  Common  Stock,  as
reported by the Nasdaq National Market.


                                                 High          Low
                                             -----------   ----------
         Fiscal Year Ended March 31, 1997
            First Quarter                      $25 1/2       $13
            Second Quarter                      15 1/4         7
            Third Quarter                       13             7 3/8
            Fourth Quarter                      14 3/8         7 5/8
         Fiscal Year Ended March 31, 1998
            First Quarter                       37 3/4        10 3/4
            Second Quarter                      64 1/4        36 1/4
            Third Quarter                       66 3/8        16 3/4
            Fourth Quarter                      20 1/2        14 5/8


     On May 18, 1998, the last reported sale price of the Company's Common Stock
on the Nasdaq  National  Market was $16.125 per share.  As of May 18, 1998 there
were approximately 305 holders of record of the Company's Common Stock.


                                 DIVIDEND POLICY

     The Company has never paid any cash  dividends on its Common Stock and does
not anticipate paying cash dividends in the foreseeable  future. The Company has
entered into a bank line of credit and the Company's  agreement with such lender
prohibits the payment of cash dividends without the prior written consent of the
lender.

                                       16

<PAGE>


ITEM 6: SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

<TABLE>
     The selected consolidated financial data set forth below under the captions
"Statement of Operations  Data" and "Balance  Sheet Data" for, and as of the end
of, each of the years in the five-year  period ended March 31, 1998, are derived
from the  consolidated  financial  statements of Spectrian  Corporation  and its
subsidiaries,  which financial statements have been audited by KPMG Peat Marwick
LLP, independent auditors.  The results for the fiscal year ended March 31, 1998
are not  necessarily  indicative  of the  results  for any  future  period.  The
selected  consolidated  financial  data  set  forth  below  should  be  read  in
conjunction with the consolidated  financial statements as of March 31, 1998 and
March 31,  1997 and for each of the years in the three year  period  ended March
31,  1998 and notes  thereto  set  forth on Pages F-1 to F-15 and  "Management's
Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation."

<CAPTION>
                                                                        Fiscal Year Ended March 31
                                                   -------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     1998            1997             1996            1995            1994
                                                   --------        --------         --------        --------        --------
                                                                   (in thousands, except per share data)
<S>                                                <C>             <C>              <C>             <C>             <C>     
Statement of Operations Data:
Revenues .......................................   $168,798        $ 88,252         $ 72,113        $ 62,478        $ 37,859
                                                   --------        --------         --------        --------        --------
Costs and expenses:
 Cost of sales .................................    132,684          65,322           45,355          39,068          22,154
 Research and development ......................     18,644          17,230           14,548          11,374          10,058
 Selling, general and administrative ...........     13,014           9,299            7,450           6,784           5,529
                                                   --------        --------         --------        --------        --------
   Total costs and expenses ....................    164,342          91,851           67,353          57,226          37,741
                                                   --------        --------         --------        --------        --------
   Operating income (loss) .....................      4,456          (3,599)           4,760           5,252             118
Interest income (expense), net .................      3,335            (392)             889             391            (667)
Other income, net ..............................      1,530            --               --              --              --
                                                   --------        --------         --------        --------        --------
 Income (loss) before income taxes .............      9,321          (3,991)           5,649           5,643            (549)
Income tax expense .............................        399            --                169             170            --
                                                   --------        --------         --------        --------        --------
 Net income (loss) .............................   $  8,922        $ (3,991)        $  5,480        $  5,473        $   (549)
                                                   ========        ========         ========        ========        ========
Net income (loss) per share:(1)
 Basic .........................................   $   0.91        $  (0.49)        $   0.71        $   0.87        $  (0.39)
 Diluted .......................................   $   0.83        $  (0.49)        $   0.66        $   0.70        $  (0.39)
Shares used in computing per share
 amounts:(1)
 Basic .........................................      9,881           8,150            7,684           6,300           1,399
 Diluted .......................................     10,701           8,150            8,363           7,764           1,399
</TABLE>


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                      March 31
                                                         --------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           1998           1997           1996           1995           1994
                                                         --------       --------       --------       --------       --------
                                                                                    (in thousands)
<S>                                                      <C>            <C>            <C>            <C>            <C>     
Balance Sheet Data:
Working capital ..................................       $117,478       $ 24,062       $ 12,710       $ 28,317       $  7,859
Total assets .....................................        175,051         66,633         55,922         45,070         20,965
Debt and capital lease obligations, net of
 current portion(2) ..............................          5,912          7,057           --             --            3,634
Total stockholders' equity .......................        144,342         42,466         44,838         37,056          9,765

<FN>
- ------------
(1)  See Note 1 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements contained on pages
     F-1 to F-15 of this  Annual  Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal  year ended
     March 31, 1998 for information concerning the per share computations.
(2)  See Note 4 of Notes  to  Consolidated  Financial  Statements  herein  for a
     description of the Company's debt and lease obligations.
</FN>
</TABLE>

                                                                 17

<PAGE>


ITEM  7. MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS
         OF OPERATIONS

     Certain  statements  in  this  "Management's  Discussion  and  Analysis  of
Financial  Condition and Results of Operations" are forward looking  statements.
These forward looking statements include, but are not limited to: the statements
in the first paragraph of "Overview" regarding future revenues; second paragraph
of  "Overview"  regarding  the  impact on the  Company  of a loss of a major OEM
customer;  the  statements in the analysis of "--Years  ended March 31, 1998 and
1997"  under  "--Cost of Sales"  regarding  anticipated  product  introductions,
related cost  improvements  and trends  offsetting such cost  improvements;  the
statements  in the second  paragraph  of  "--Liquidity  and  Capital  Resources"
concerning renewal of the revolving line of credit to this the statements in the
last  paragraph  under  "--Liquidity  and  Capital   Resources"   regarding  the
anticipated spending for capital additions in fiscal 1999 and the sufficiency of
the  Company's   available   resources  to  meet  working  capital  and  capital
expenditure  requirements;  and the  statements  in  "Factors  Affecting  Future
Operating Results." The forward looking statements contained herein are based on
current expectations and entail various risks and uncertainties that could cause
actual results to differ materially from these expressed in such forward looking
statements.

Overview

     The Company designs,  manufactures and markets highly linear single carrier
and multicarrier power amplifiers that support a broad range of worldwide analog
and digital wireless transmissions  standards,  including AMPS, TDMA, CDMA, TACS
and  GSM.  The  Company,  founded  in 1984 to  perform  design  and  engineering
services,  first entered the commercial amplifier market in 1988 and shipped its
first cellular power amplifiers in 1990. The Company's  revenues are now derived
primarily from sales to a limited number of OEMs in the wireless  infrastructure
equipment market, in particular Northern Telecom. The Company pursues a strategy
of vertical  integration in its design and  manufacturing  processes,  including
operating its own 4 inch wafer fabrication  facility.  As a result,  the Company
has a higher level of fixed costs and is dependent upon  substantial  revenue to
achieve  profitability.  In the fourth quarter of fiscal 1998,  first quarter of
fiscal  1997 and third  quarter of fiscal  1996,  product  orders  fell  sharply
resulting in  substantial  losses in those  quarters.  There can be no assurance
that the Company  will not  experience  such  fluctuations  in the  future.  For
example, the significant reduction in product revenue the Company experienced in
the fourth quarter of fiscal 1998 reflects the impact of  fluctuations in demand
with a cost  structure  that is  relatively  fixed in the  short  term  from the
softening  demand in the TDMA  markets and delays in build-out of the Korean PCS
systems  due to the  unstable  Asian  financial  markets  and  general  economic
conditions  in Korea and other Asian  countries.  The Company  also  anticipates
lower product  revenues over the next two to three  quarters as a result of such
factors and  anticipates  that revenues for fiscal 1999 may not equal,  and will
not exceed, revenues for fiscal 1998.

     During fiscal 1998,  Northern Telecom,  Nortel Matra and LGIC accounted for
approximately  57%, 22% and 14% of revenues,  respectively.  During fiscal 1997,
Northern  Telecom and Nortel Matra  accounted for  approximately  63% and 12% of
revenues,  respectively.  During fiscal 1996,  Northern Telecom and Nortel Matra
accounted for approximately 58% and 17% of revenues, respectively. The Company's
business,  financial  condition and results of operations  have been  materially
adversely  affected in the past by anticipated orders failing to materialize and
by  deferrals  or  cancellations  of  orders  as a  result  of  changes  in  OEM
requirements.  If the Company were to lose  Northern  Telecom or any other major
OEM customer,  or if orders by Northern  Telecom or any other major OEM customer
were to otherwise  materially  decrease either in unit quantity or in price, the
Company's  business,  financial  condition  and results of  operations  would be
materially adversely affected. In addition,  the recent financial market turmoil
and  economic  downturn  in Korea  may have a  material  adverse  effect  on the
Company's  sales of its  products  to LGIC,  an OEM  based in  Korea,  because a
majority  of the  Company's  products  ordered  by LGIC to  date  relate  to the
build-out of the Korean PCS system. In addition,  because the Company's products
are priced in U.S.  dollars,  the currency  instability  in the Korean and other
Asian  financial  markets may have the effect of making the  Company's  products
more  expensive  to LGIC than those of other  manufacturers  whose  products are
priced in one of the affected Asian currencies,  and, therefore, LGIC may reduce
future purchases of the Company's products.

                                       18

<PAGE>


     The  Company's  vertical  integration  strategy  entails a number of risks,
including a high level of fixed and variable  costs,  the  management of complex
processes,  dependence  on a single  source  of supply  and a strict  regulatory
environment.  During periods of low demand,  high fixed wafer  fabrication costs
are likely to have a material  adverse  effect on the Company's  operations.  In
addition, the Company's strategy of frequently introducing and rapidly expanding
the  manufacture  of new  products to meet  evolving  OEM  customer and wireless
service  provider needs has caused the Company to experience  high materials and
manufacturing  costs,  including  high  scrap and  material  waste,  significant
material obsolescence,  labor inefficiencies,  high overtime hours,  inefficient
material procurement and an inability to realize economies of scale.

     The market for the Company's products is becoming increasingly competitive.
The Company has recently  begun  selling its power  amplifier  products in South
Korea, as well as directly to cellular  service  providers where its competitors
are already established as suppliers.  In addition, the Company competes with at
least one  amplifier  manufacturer  for business  from  Northern  Telecom.  This
competition  has  resulted  in, and will  continue to result in reduced  average
selling prices for the Company's  products,  which  accordingly  will negatively
impact gross margins.

Results of Operations

     The following table sets forth for the periods  indicated certain statement
of operations  data of the Company  expressed as a percentage of total  revenues
and the gross margin on sales.


                                                  Fiscal Year ended March 31,
                                                 ------------------------------
                                                 1998        1997         1996
                                                 -----       -----        -----
Revenues ..................................      100.0%      100.0%       100.0%
                                                 -----       -----        -----
Costs and expenses:
 Cost of sales ............................       78.6        74.0         62.9
 Research and development .................       11.0        19.6         20.2
 Selling, general and administrative ......        7.8        10.5         10.3
                                                 -----       -----        -----
   Total costs and expenses ...............       97.4       104.1         93.4
                                                 -----       -----        -----
   Operating income (loss) ................        2.6        (4.1)         6.6
Interest income (expense), net ............        2.0        (0.4)         1.2
Other income, net .........................        0.9        --           --
                                                 -----       -----        -----
 Income (loss) before income taxes ........        5.5        (4.5)         7.8
Income tax expense ........................        0.2        --            0.2
                                                 -----       -----        -----
 Net income (loss) ........................        5.3%       (4.5)%        7.6%
                                                 =====       =====        =====
Gross margin on sales .....................       21.4%      26.0 %        37.1%


   Years Ended March 31, 1998 and 1997

     Revenues. The Company's revenues increased by 91% to $168.8 million for the
fiscal year ending  March 31, 1998  ("fiscal  1998") from $88.3  million for the
fiscal  year ending  March 31, 1997  ("fiscal  1997").  The sizable  increase in
revenues for fiscal 1998 reflects a significant  increase in demand in the first
three fiscal quarters of 1998,  primarily by Northern Telecom, for the Company's
second  generation GSM and multicarrier  products,  single carrier TDMA products
and  Korean  PCS CDMA  products.  In the  fourth  quarter  of fiscal  1998,  the
Company's revenues  decreased  substantially to $27.6 million from $47.2 million
in the  immediately  preceding  quarter due to reduced orders from OEM customers
stemming in part from the impact of the financial market and economic turmoil in
parts of Asia, particularly Korea. The Company believes that it is unlikely that
demand for the Company's  products will return to prior levels in calendar 1998,
if ever.  As a result of this factor and others as well as the  difficulties  in
predicting the Company's future revenue,  the Company believes that the revenues
in fiscal 1999 may not meet, and will not exceed, fiscal 1998 revenues.

     Cost of  Sales.  Cost of sales  consists  primarily  of raw  materials,  RF
semiconductor  fabrication  costs,  amplifier assembly and test costs (including
turnkey assembly services), overhead and warranty costs. The

                                       19

<PAGE>


Company's cost of sales increased by 103% to $132.7 million for fiscal 1998 from
$65.3  million  for  fiscal  1997.  Included  in the  cost of sales  were  costs
associated with the rapid increase in manufacturing  volume for new products and
costs associated with  discontinuing  older products.  Gross margin on sales was
21% for fiscal  1998 as compared  to 26% for fiscal  1997.  The decline in gross
margin  for fiscal  1998  primarily  reflects  costs  associated  with steep new
product   volume   manufacturing   growth   including   investment  in  overhead
infrastructure  and automated  test  equipment,  premium costs  associated  with
materials procurement and logistics, excess and obsolete inventories and product
warranty  costs.  In the fourth quarter of fiscal 1998, the Company had negative
gross margin of 17.4% as compared to positive  gross  margins of 28.5% and 27.2%
in the third  quarter  of fiscal  1998 and the fourth  quarter  of fiscal  1997,
respectively.  The decline in the gross margin for the fourth  quarter of fiscal
1998 was  attributable  to  increased  material,  warranty,  excess and obsolete
inventory costs that were not reduced  proportionately to revenues.  The Company
anticipates that the use of turnkey  contractors to assemble certain high volume
printed circuit board components may reduce the growth of manufacturing costs in
future periods.

     Research and Development. Research and development ("R&D") expenses include
the  cost  of  designing,  developing  or  reducing  the  manufacturing  cost of
amplifiers and RF semiconductors.  The Company's R&D expenses increased by 8% to
$18.6 million in fiscal 1998 from $17.2 million in fiscal 1997.  R&D spending in
fiscal  1997  included   development  costs  for  the  Company's  4  inch  wafer
fabrication  facility.  The  increase in R&D  spending  in fiscal 1998  reflects
increased  spending  in both  amplifier  and  semiconductor  R&D  for  personnel
expenses and project  development  expenses.  R&D  expenses as a  percentage  of
revenues decreased to 11.0% in fiscal 1998 from 19.6% in fiscal 1997, reflecting
the substantially higher revenue levels in fiscal 1998.

     Selling,  General and Administrative.  Selling,  general and administrative
("SG&A") expenses include compensation and benefits for sales, marketing, senior
management and administrative  personnel,  commissions paid to independent sales
representatives,  professional  fees and  other  expenses.  The  Company's  SG&A
expenses  increased by 39.9% to $13.0  million for fiscal 1998 from $9.3 million
for fiscal 1997. SG&A expenses as a percentage of revenues decreased to 7.8% for
fiscal  1998 from 10.5% for fiscal  1997.  The  increase  in SG&A  expenses  was
primarily due to outside commissions paid for South Korean sales, MIS investment
in new infrastructure, increases in sales and administrative headcount, and to a
lesser  extent the  maintenance  of a South Korean  sales  support  office.  The
decrease  of  SG&A  expenses  as a  percentage  of  sales  was a  result  of the
substantially higher revenue level in that period.

     Interest Income (Expense),  net.  Interest income,  net for fiscal 1998 was
$3.3 million  compared to net interest  expense of $392,000 for fiscal 1997. The
increase  in net  interest  income was the result of interest  income  earned on
substantially  higher  cash  balances  and  short-term   investments  reflecting
primarily the  investment  of the proceeds of the  Company's  August 1997 public
offering.

     Other Income,  net.  Other income of $1.5 million was recorded in the first
quarter of fiscal 1998  representing the net gain realized from the cash sale of
the  Company's  wholly  owned  subsidiary,  AMT,  to the  management  group  and
employees of AMT. No other  expense or other income was recorded  during  fiscal
1997.

     Income Taxes.  The Company  recorded  income tax expense for fiscal 1998 of
$399,000.  The combined  effective tax rate of 4.3% for fiscal 1998 reflects the
use of net operating loss carryforwards  ("NOLs").  The Company's ability to use
its NOLs against taxable income may be subject to  restrictions  and limitations
under Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, in the event
of a change in ownership of the Company as defined therein.

   Years Ended March 31, 1997 and 1996

     Revenues.  The  Company's  revenues  increased by 22.4% to $88.3 million in
fiscal 1997 from $72.1 million in fiscal 1996. The increase was due primarily to
increasing volume in sales of PCS products, reflecting the build-out of the U.S.
PCS network infrastructure, and continued strong GSM product sales.

     Cost of Sales.  The  Company's  cost of sales  increased  by 44.0% to $65.3
million in fiscal 1997 from $45.4 million in fiscal 1996.  Gross margin on sales
in fiscal 1997  declined to 26.0% from 37.1% in fiscal 1996.  During fiscal 1997
the Company introduced 14 new products into manufacturing to meet customer and

                                       20

<PAGE>


market  demands.  The need to produce  many of these  products  in high  volumes
during their manufacturing infancy resulted in much higher costs for the related
material,  labor and  overhead.  The heavy new product  volume had a detrimental
effect on the Company's fiscal 1997 gross margins and profitability.

     Research and  Development.  The Company's R&D expenses  increased  18.4% to
$17.2  million in fiscal 1997 from $14.5 million in fiscal 1996. As a percentage
of revenues,  R&D expenses  declined slightly to 19.6% in fiscal 1997 from 20.2%
in fiscal 1996. The increase in R&D expenses primarily  reflected nine months of
development  expenses  for the  Company's 4 inch wafer  fabrication  facility as
compared to only three months in fiscal 1996 as well as increased R&D hiring and
the associated recruiting and salary costs.

     Selling, General and Administrative.  The Company's SG&A expenses increased
by 24.8% to $9.3 million in fiscal 1997 from $7.5  million in fiscal 1996.  SG&A
expenses as a percentage of revenues  increased slightly to 10.5% in fiscal 1997
from 10.3% in fiscal  1996.  The increase in SG&A  expenses  from fiscal 1996 to
fiscal 1997 was  primarily  attributable  to  increases  in sales and  marketing
headcount  and the related  salaries  and expense  benefits,  as well as outside
commissions  expenses required to support the Company's  expanding customer base
and product portfolio.

     Interest Income  (Expense),  net. Net interest  expense for fiscal 1997 was
$392,000, compared to net interest income of $889,000 in fiscal 1996. The change
between fiscal 1997 and fiscal 1996 primarily reflects decreased interest income
as a result of lower  average  cash  balances  in fiscal  1997 and the  interest
expense  incurred as a result of the Company  utilizing  various debt  financing
instruments during fiscal 1997.

     Income  Taxes.  The Company did not record a provision  for income taxes in
fiscal 1997 because the Company  incurred a net loss. An income tax provision of
$169,000 was recorded in fiscal 1996,  an effective  tax rate of 3% after use of
NOLs from prior periods.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

     The Company has financed its growth through its initial public  offering in
August 1994, a public  equity  offering in August 1997,  private sales of equity
securities,  capital equipment leases,  bank lines of credit and cash flows from
operations.  Cash provided by operations was $16.6 million in fiscal 1998, while
cash used by operations  in fiscal 1997 was $8.1  million.  The cash provided by
operations for fiscal 1998 was  principally  generated by the Company's  profits
over the first three quarters of the fiscal year. The cash used by operations in
fiscal 1997 was  principally  for  purchasing  inventory  to support  production
growth for increasing product shipment volumes.

     As of March 31,  1998,  the Company had working  capital of $117.5  million
including $99.6 million in cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments. In
addition,  the Company has a revolving  line of credit of $10.0  million  with a
bank secured by the  majority of the  Company's  assets.  Under the terms of the
master agreement  governing this credit  instrument,  the Company is required to
maintain certain minimum working  capital,  net worth,  profitability  and other
specific  financial  ratios. As of March 31, 1998, the Company was in compliance
with all of these  financial  covenants with the exception of the  profitability
covenant  with  respect to which  covenant  the  lender  granted a waiver to the
Company.  There were no borrowings outstanding against this line of credit as of
March 31, 1998.

     In April  1998,  the  Company  announced a  repurchase  program  (the "1998
Repurchase  Program")  pursuant to which it may acquire up to one million shares
of  Common  Stock  in open  market  purchases.  To date,  no  shares  have  been
repurchased under the 1998 Repurchase Program.

     In January  1997,  the  Company  borrowed  $6.0  million  under a term loan
secured by certain capital  equipment.  The loan, which expires in January 2002,
requires  the  payment  of monthly  principal  plus  interest  and is subject to
certain minimum working capital,  net worth and other specific financial ratios.
The Company was in  compliance  with these  covenants as of March 31,  1998.  In
March 1997,  the Company also  secured a $3.2  million  real estate loan,  which
expires in April 2007, for the purchase of a light  industrial  building for its
future facilities expansion.

     Additions to property and equipment  were $18.0 million for fiscal 1998 and
$16.3  million in fiscal 1997.  Capital  additions  for fiscal 1998 included the
purchase of new corporate management information

                                       21

<PAGE>


systems  software,  manufacturing  test and  production  equipment  required  to
support new  products  and  increase  factory  capacity,  and test  equipment to
support various research and development projects.

     The Company anticipates spending approximately $18 million over the next 12
months  for  capital  additions  primarily  to  support  manufacturing  capacity
requirements,  development  projects  and  facilities  expansion.  Based  on the
Company's current working capital  position,  the cash flows the Company expects
to generate from fiscal 1999  operations  and the  available  line of credit the
Company expects to renew, the Company believes that sufficient resources will be
available to meet the Company's cash  requirements  for at least the next twelve
months.  Cash  requirements  for periods beyond the next twelve months depend on
the Company's profitability,  timing and level of capital expenditures,  working
capital requirements and rate of growth.

Factors Affecting Future Operating Results

     Customer  Concentration;  Dependence  on  Northern  Telecom.  The  wireless
infrastructure  equipment  market is  dominated by a small number of large OEMs,
including Ericsson, Lucent, Motorola, Northern Telecom, Nortel Matra and Siemens
AG. The Company's  revenues are derived primarily from sales to a limited number
of these OEMs,  particularly  Northern  Telecom and Nortel Matra.  During fiscal
1998 Northern Telecom,  Nortel Matra and LGIC accounted for  approximately  57%,
22% and 14% of revenues, respectively.  During fiscal 1997, Northern Telecom and
Nortel Matra accounted for approximately 63% and 12% of revenues,  respectively.
During   fiscal  1996,   Northern   Telecom  and  Nortel  Matra   accounted  for
approximately 58% and 17% of revenues, respectively.  Furthermore, a substantial
portion of  revenues  from  Northern  Telecom and Nortel  Matra in fiscal  1998,
fiscal  1997 and fiscal  1996  resulted  from  sales of a limited  number of the
Company's products.  The Company's business,  financial condition and results of
operations  have been materially  adversely  affected in the past by anticipated
orders failing to materialize and by deferrals or  cancellations  of orders as a
result of changes in OEM requirements.  The Company, Northern Telecom and Nortel
Matra have an  agreement,  renegotiated  annually,  pursuant  to which  Northern
Telecom and Nortel  Matra  commit to purchase a certain  volume of their  annual
power amplifier  requirements for specified prices from the Company. The renewal
of the Company's  agreement with Northern  Telecom and Nortel Matra for calendar
year 1998 was  finalized in October  1997.  Based on lower RF  amplifier  volume
commitments and reduced pricing contained in this agreement, the recent slowdown
in demand for TDMA  products and delays in the Korean PCS system  build-out,  as
well as other factors, the Company expects that the Company's recent significant
growth in revenues will not be sustainable.  The Company also  anticipates  that
the  Company's  fiscal 1999 revenues may not meet,  and will not exceed,  fiscal
1998 revenues. In addition,  there can be no assurance that Northern Telecom and
Nortel Matra will enter into a contract as favorable to the Company,  if any, in
the future otherwise agree to purchase the same or similar levels of their power
amplifier  requirements  at the same or similar  pricing.  Any  reduction in the
level of purchases of the Company's  amplifiers  by Northern  Telecom and Nortel
Matra, or any material reduction in pricing without significant  offsets,  would
have a material adverse effect on the Company's  business,  financial  condition
and results of operations. Further, if the Company were to lose Northern Telecom
or any other major OEM customer,  or if orders by Northern  Telecom or any other
major  OEM  customer  were  to  otherwise  materially  decrease,  the  Company's
business,  financial  condition  and results of  operations  would be materially
adversely  affected.  In  addition,  the recent  financial  market  turmoil  and
economic  downturn in Korea may have a material  adverse effect on the Company's
sales of its products to LGIC, an OEM based in Korea,  because a majority of the
Company's products ordered by LGIC to date relate to the build-out of the Korean
PCS system.  In  addition,  because the  Company's  products  are priced in U.S.
dollars,  the  currency  instability  in the  Korean and other  Asian  financial
markets may have the effect of making the Company's  products more  expensive to
LGIC than those of other  manufacturers  whose products are priced in one of the
affected Asian currencies,  and, therefore,  LGIC may reduce future purchases of
the Company's products. In addition, wireless infrastructure equipment OEMs have
come under increasing price pressure from wireless service  providers,  which in
turn has resulted in downward  pricing pressure on the Company's  products.  The
Company expects to incur increasing  pricing pressures from Northern Telecom and
other major OEM  customers  in future  periods,  which could result in declining
average sales prices for the Company's products.  See "Business--OEM  Customers,
Sales and Marketing."

                                       22

<PAGE>


     Fluctuations  in Operating  Results.  The  Company's  quarterly  and annual
results have in the past been,  and will continue to be,  subject to significant
fluctuations  due to a number of  factors,  any of which  could  have a material
adverse  effect on the Company's  business,  financial  condition and results of
operations.  In  particular,  the Company's  results of operations are likely to
vary due to the timing,  cancellation,  delay or  rescheduling  of OEM  customer
orders  and  shipments;  the timing of  announcements  or  introductions  of new
products by the Company, its competitors or their respective OEM customers;  the
acceptance  of such  products by wireless  equipment  OEMs and their  customers;
relative variations in manufacturing efficiencies, yields and costs; competitive
factors  such  as  the   pricing,   availability,   and  demand  for   competing
amplification  products;  changes  in average  sales  prices  and  product  mix;
variations  in  operating  expenses;   changes  in  manufacturing  capacity  and
variations in the utilization of this capacity;  shortages of key supplies;  the
long sales cycles associated with the Company's customer specific products;  the
timing  and level of product  and  process  development  costs;  and  changes in
inventory  levels;  and most  recently,  the  relative  strength  or weakness of
international  financial  markets.  Anticipated  orders from the  Company's  OEM
customers  have in the past failed to  materialize  and delivery  schedules have
been  deferred or canceled as a result of changes in OEM  customer  requirements
and the Company  expects  this  pattern to  continue  as  customer  requirements
continue to change and industry standards continue to evolve. Reduced demand for
wireless  infrastructure  equipment  in the latter  part of fiscal  1996 and the
early  part of fiscal  1997,  driven  partly by delays in the  build-out  of PCS
infrastructure,  caused significant  fluctuations in the Company's product sales
during that period of time.  There can be no assurance that the Company will not
experience  such  fluctuations  in  the  future,   and,  in  fact,  the  Company
experienced a significant  reduction in product revenue in the fourth quarter of
fiscal 1998 and  anticipates  lower product  revenues over the next two to three
quarters  as a result of  softening  demand in the TDMA  markets  and  delays in
Korean  PCS demand due to the  unstable  Asian  financial  markets  and  general
economic conditions in Korea and other Asian countries.  The Company establishes
its expenditure  levels for product  development  and other  operating  expenses
based on its expected  revenues,  and expenses are relatively fixed in the short
term.  As a  result,  variations  in timing of  revenues  can cause  significant
variations in quarterly  results of  operations.  There can be no assurance that
the Company will be profitable on a quarter to quarter basis in the future.  The
Company believes that period to period  comparisons of its financial results are
not  necessarily  meaningful  and should not be relied upon as an  indication of
future performance.  Due to all the foregoing factors, it is likely that in some
future quarter or quarters the Company's  revenues or operating results will not
meet the  expectations  of public stock market  analysts or  investors.  In such
event,  the market  price of the  Company's  Common  Stock  would be  materially
adversely affected.

     Internal Amplifier Design and Production  Capabilities of OEMs. The Company
believes that a majority of the present worldwide production of power amplifiers
is captive within the manufacturing  operations of wireless equipment OEMs, many
of which have chosen not to purchase  amplifiers  from  outside  suppliers.  The
Company also believes  that those OEMs that purchase from third party  amplifier
vendors are reluctant to switch once committed to a particular  merchant vendor.
Consequently, the Company has only limited opportunities to increase revenues by
replacing  internal  OEM  amplifier  production  or  displacing  other  merchant
amplifier suppliers.  Moreover,  given the limited opportunities for merchant RF
amplifier  suppliers,  any decision by an OEM to employ a second source merchant
supplier for a product  currently  purchased from a merchant supplier may reduce
the existing  merchant  supplier's  ability to maintain a given level of product
sales to such OEM or,  possibly,  to retain the OEM as a  customer  due to price
competition from the second source merchant supplier.  There can be no assurance
that the Company's  major OEM customers will continue to rely, or increase their
reliance,  on the  Company  as an  external  source  of supply  for their  power
amplifiers,  or that other wireless  equipment OEMs will become customers of the
Company.  If  the  major  wireless  infrastructure  equipment  suppliers  do not
purchase or continue to purchase their power amplifiers from merchant suppliers,
the Company's  business,  results of operations and financial  condition will be
materially  adversely  affected.   See  "Business--OEM   Customers,   Sales  and
Marketing."

     Rapid Technological Change; Evolving Industry Standards;  Dependence on New
Products.  The markets in which the Company  and its OEM  customers  compete are
characterized by rapidly changing

                                       23

<PAGE>


technology,  evolving industry standards and continuous improvements in products
and services. In particular,  because the Company's strategy of rapidly bringing
to market products customized for numerous and evolving RF modulation  standards
requires  developing  and  achieving  volume  production  of a large  number  of
distinct  products,   the  Company's  ability  to  rapidly  design  and  produce
individual products for which there is significant OEM customer demand will be a
critical  determinant of the Company's  future success.  For example,  continued
softening of demand in the TDMA market or failure of another modulation standard
in which the Company has invested substantial  development  resources may have a
material  adverse  effect on the  Company's  business,  financial  condition and
results of  operations.  No assurance  can be given that the  Company's  product
development efforts will be successful, that its new products will meet customer
requirements and be accepted or that its OEM customers'  product  offerings will
achieve customer acceptance.  If a significant number of development projects do
not result in  substantial  volume  production or if  technologies  or standards
supported by the Company's or its customers' products become obsolete or fail to
gain widespread commercial acceptance,  the Company's business may be materially
adversely  affected.  See  "Business--OEM   Customers,   Sales  and  Marketing,"
"--Manufacturing" and "--Research and Development."

     Risks Associated with Internal Wafer and Device Fabrication.  The Company's
operation  of its wafer and device  fabrication  facilities  entails a number of
risks,  including a high level of fixed and variable  costs,  the  management of
complex  processes,  dependence  on a  single  source  of  supply  and a  strict
regulatory  environment.   During  periods  of  low  demand,  high  fixed  wafer
fabrication  costs are likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company's
business,  financial  condition  and  results  of  operations.  The  design  and
fabrication  of  RF  semiconductors  is a  complex  and  precise  process.  Such
manufacturing  is sensitive to a wide variety of factors,  including  variations
and  impurities  in  the  raw  materials,   quality  control  of  the  packages,
difficulties  in the  fabrication  process,  performance  of  the  manufacturing
equipment,  defects in the masks used to print circuits on a wafer and the level
of contaminants in the manufacturing environment. As a result of these and other
factors,  semiconductor  manufacturing yields from time to time in the past have
suffered, and there can be no assurance that the Company will be able to achieve
acceptable production yields in the future. In addition, the Company's wafer and
device  fabrication  facility  represents  a  single  point  of  failure  in its
manufacturing  process that would be costly and time consuming to replace if its
operation were interrupted.  The interruption of wafer fabrication operations or
the loss of employees  dedicated to the wafer and device fabrication  facilities
could  have a  material  adverse  effect on the  Company's  business,  financial
condition and results of operations.  Any failure to maintain  acceptable  wafer
and  device  production  levels,  will  have a  material  adverse  effect on the
Company's  business,   financial  condition  and  results  of  operations.   See
"Business--Manufacturing" and "--Facilities."

     Product Quality,  Performance and Reliability. The Company expects that its
customers  will  continue to  establish  demanding  specifications  for quality,
performance  and  reliability  that must be met by the  Company's  products.  RF
semiconductors  as  complex  as those  offered by the  Company  often  encounter
development  delays and may contain  undetected  defects or failures  when first
introduced or after commencement of commercial  shipments.  The Company has from
time to time in the past experienced product quality, performance or reliability
problems.  In addition,  multicarrier power amplifiers have a higher probability
of  malfunction  than single carrier power  amplifiers  because of their greater
complexity. There can be no assurance that defects or failures will not occur in
the  future  relating  to  the  Company's   product  quality,   performance  and
reliability that may have a material  adverse effect on the Company's  business,
financial condition and results of operations. See "Business--Manufacturing."

     Sole or Limited  Sources of Materials and Services.  The Company  currently
procures from single  sources  certain  components and services for its products
including cast housings,  printed circuit boards,  specialized RF components and
specialized  subassemblies.  The Company purchases these components and services
on a purchase  order  basis,  does not carry  significant  inventories  of these
components and does not have any long-term supply contracts with its sole source
vendors.  Although the Company is currently  identifying  potential  alternative
sources of these components, its reliance on sole sources entails certain risks,
including  reduced  control over the price,  timely  delivery,  reliability  and
quality of the components.  If the Company were to change any of its sole source
vendors, the Company would be

                                       24

<PAGE>


required to requalify the components with each new vendor.  Any inability of the
Company to obtain timely  deliveries  of  components  of  acceptable  quality in
required  quantities or a significant  increase in the prices of components  for
which  the  Company  does not have  alternative  sources  could  materially  and
adversely  affect the  Company's  business,  financial  condition and results of
operations.  The Company has occasionally  experienced difficulties in obtaining
these components, and no assurance can be given that shortages will not occur in
the future. See "Business--Manufacturing."

     Declining Average Sales Prices. The Company has experienced, and expects to
continue  to  experience,  declining  average  sales  prices  for its  products.
Wireless infrastructure equipment manufacturers have come under increasing price
pressure from wireless service providers, which in turn has resulted in downward
pricing  pressure on the  Company's  products.  In addition,  competition  among
merchant  suppliers has increased the downward pricing pressure on the Company's
products.  Since  wireless  infrastructure  equipment  manufacturers  frequently
negotiate  supply  arrangements  far in advance of delivery  dates,  the Company
often must commit to price  reductions  for its  products  before it is aware of
how, or if, cost reductions can be obtained.  To offset declining  average sales
prices, the Company believes that it must achieve manufacturing cost reductions.
If the Company is unable to achieve such cost  reductions,  the Company's  gross
margins will decline,  and such decline will have a material  adverse  effect on
the  Company's  business,  financial  condition and results of  operations.  See
"Business--Manufacturing."

     Risks of International  Sales. Sales outside of the United States were 95%,
73%  and  72%  of  revenues  in  fiscal  1998,  fiscal  1997  and  fiscal  1996,
respectively.  The Company  expects that  international  sales will  continue to
account for a significant  percentage of the  Company's  total  revenues for the
foreseeable  future.  These sales involve a number of inherent risks,  including
imposition of government  controls,  currency exchange  fluctuations,  potential
insolvency  of  international  distributors  and  representatives  or customers,
reduced  protection for  intellectual  property  rights in some  countries,  the
impact of  recessionary  environments  in economies  outside the United  States,
political  instability and generally longer receivables  collection  periods, as
well as tariffs and other trade barriers. In addition, because substantially all
of the Company's foreign sales are denominated in U.S. dollars, increases in the
value of the dollar  relative to the local  currency would increase the price of
the  Company's  products  in foreign  markets  and make the  Company's  products
relatively more expensive and less price competitive than competitors'  products
that are  priced in local  currencies.  There  can be no  assurance  that  these
factors  will  not  have a  material  adverse  effect  on the  Company's  future
international  sales and,  consequently,  on the Company's  business,  financial
condition and results of  operations.  The Company  anticipates  that the recent
turmoil  in  Asian  financial  markets  and  the  recent  deterioration  of  the
underlying  economic conditions in certain Asian countries may have an impact on
its sales to customers located in or whose projects are based in those countries
due to  the  impact  of  currency  fluctuations  on the  relative  price  of the
Company's products and restrictions on government spending imposed by the IMF on
those countries receiving the IMF's assistance. In addition,  customers in those
countries  may  face  reduced  access  to  working  capital  to  fund  component
purchases, such as the Company's products, due to higher interest rates, reduced
bank lending due to contractions in the money supply or the deterioration in the
customer's  or its bank's  financial  condition or the inability to access local
equity financing.  A substantial  majority of the Company's products are sold to
OEMs who incorporate  the Company's  products into systems sold and installed to
end-user customers. These OEMs are not required by contract and do not typically
provide the Company  with  information  regarding  the  location and identity of
their end-user customers,  and, therefore,  the Company is not able to determine
what  portion  of  its  product  sales  have  been  or  future  orders  will  be
incorporated  into OEM sales to  end-users  in those Asian  countries  currently
experiencing   financial   market  turmoil  and/or   deterioration  of  economic
conditions. Furthermore, a large portion of the Company's existing customers and
potential new customers are servicing new markets in developing  countries  that
the Company's customers expect will deploy wireless communication networks as an
alternative to the construction of a wireline infrastructure.  If such countries
decline to construct  wireless  communication  systems,  or construction of such
systems is delayed for any reason,  including  business and economic  conditions
and changes in economic stability due to factors such as increased inflation and
political  turmoil,  such  delays  could have a material  adverse  effect on the
Company's  business,   results  of  operations  and  financial  condition.   See
"Business--OEM Customers, Sales and Marketing."

                                       25

<PAGE>


     Reliance  upon Growth of Wireless  Services.  Sales of power  amplifiers to
wireless infrastructure  equipment suppliers have in the past accounted, and are
expected  in the  future to  account,  for  substantially  all of the  Company's
product sales. Demand for wireless infrastructure  equipment is driven by demand
for wireless  service.  Although demand for power amplifiers has grown in recent
years,  if demand for  wireless  services  fails to increase or  increases  more
slowly than the Company or its OEM customers currently anticipate, the Company's
business,  financial condition and results of operations would be materially and
adversely affected. See "Business--Industry Background."

     Market for the  Company's  Products  Is Highly  Competitive.  The  wireless
communications  equipment industry is extremely competitive and is characterized
by rapid technological change, new product development and product obsolescence,
evolving  industry  standards and  significant  price erosion over the life of a
product.  The  ability  of the  Company  to  compete  successfully  and  sustain
profitability  depends in part upon the rates at which  wireless  equipment OEMs
incorporate the Company's  products into their systems and the Company  captures
market share from other merchant  suppliers.  The Company's major OEM customers,
including  Northern  Telecom,  Nortel  Matra,  LGIC and  QUALCOMM,  continuously
evaluate  whether to manufacture  their own  amplification  products or purchase
them from outside  sources.  There can be no assurance  that these OEM customers
will  incorporate  the Company's  products into their systems or that in general
they will continue to rely,  or expand their  reliance,  on external  sources of
supply for their power amplifiers. These customers and other large manufacturers
of  wireless  communications  equipment  could also elect to enter the  merchant
market and compete  directly  with the Company,  and at least one OEM,  NEC, has
already done so. Such increased  competition  could materially  adversely affect
the  Company's  business,  financial  condition and results of  operations.  See
"--Internal Amplifier Design and Production Capabilities of OEMs."

     The   Company's   principal   competitors   in  the  market  for   wireless
amplification  products  provided by merchant  suppliers  currently  include AML
Communications,  Amplidyne,  Hewlett-Packard  Wireless Infrastructure  Division,
M/A--COM (a  subsidiary  of AMP),  Microwave  Power  Devices,  NEC and Powerwave
Technologies.  No assurance can be given that the Company's competitors will not
develop new  technologies or enhancements to existing  products or introduce new
products that will offer superior price or performance  features compared to the
Company's products. See "Business--Competition."

     Uncertain  Protection of Intellectual  Property.  The Company's  ability to
compete  successfully and achieve future revenue growth will depend, in part, on
its ability to protect its proprietary technology and operate without infringing
the rights of others.  The Company has a policy of seeking patents on inventions
resulting from its ongoing research and development activities.  The Company has
been  awarded  16  United  States  patents,  and  has 22  United  States  patent
applications pending,  including five that had been allowed but not yet formally
issued.  The Company  also has been  awarded  four  foreign  patents and has ten
foreign  patent  applications  pending.  There  can  be no  assurance  that  the
Company's  pending  patent  applications  will be  allowed or that the issued or
pending   patents  will  not  be  challenged  or  circumvented  by  competitors.
Notwithstanding  the Company's active pursuit of patent protection,  the Company
believes that the success of its business  depends more on the collective  value
of its  patents,  specifications,  computer  aided  design and  modeling  tools,
technical  processes and employee  expertise.  The Company generally enters into
confidentiality and nondisclosure agreements with its employees,  suppliers, OEM
customers,  and potential customers and limits access to and distribution of its
proprietary  technology.  However,  there can be no assurance that such measures
will  provide  adequate  protection  for the  Company's  trade  secrets or other
proprietary  information,  or that the Company's  trade  secrets or  proprietary
technology  will not  otherwise  become known or be  independently  developed by
competitors.  The failure of the Company to protect its  proprietary  technology
could have a material  adverse effect on its business,  financial  condition and
results of operations. See "Business--Patents and Proprietary Technology."

     Risk of Third Party Claims of Infringement.  The  communications  equipment
industry is  characterized  by vigorous  protection and pursuit of  intellectual
property  rights or  positions,  which have  resulted in  significant  and often
protracted  and  expensive  litigation.  Although  there is currently no pending
intellectual  property  litigation  against  the  Company,  the  Company  or its
suppliers  may from time to time be  notified  of claims that the Company may be
infringing patents or other intellectual property rights owned by third parties.
If it is  necessary  or  desirable,  the  Company may seek  licenses  under such
patents or other

                                       26

<PAGE>


intellectual property rights.  However,  there can be no assurance that licenses
will be offered or that the terms of any offered  licenses will be acceptable to
the Company.  The failure to obtain a license from a third party for  technology
used by the Company or  otherwise  secure  rights to use such  technology  could
cause the Company to incur substantial  liabilities,  to suspend the manufacture
of products or expend significant resources to develop noninfringing technology.
There  can be no  assurance  that  the  Company  would  be  successful  in  such
development or that such licenses would be available on reasonable  terms, if at
all.  In the event that any third  party makes a  successful  claim  against the
Company  or its  customers  and either a license  is not made  available  to the
Company  on  commercially   reasonable   terms  or  a  "design  around"  is  not
practicable,   the  Company's  business,  financial  condition  and  results  of
operations would be materially adversely affected.  Furthermore, the Company may
initiate  claims or litigation  against third  parties for  infringement  of the
Company's  proprietary  rights or to  establish  the  validity of the  Company's
proprietary  rights.  Litigation  by or  against  the  Company  could  result in
significant  expense to the  Company  and divert  the  efforts of the  Company's
technical and management personnel,  whether or not such litigation results in a
favorable  determination  for the Company.  In the event of an adverse result in
any such litigation,  the Company could be required to pay substantial  damages,
indemnify  its  customers,  cease the  manufacture,  use and sale of  infringing
products,  expend  significant  resources to develop  noninfringing  technology,
discontinue  the use of certain  processes or obtain  licenses to the infringing
technology. See "Business--Patents and Proprietary Technology."

     Government   Regulation  of   Communications   Industry.   Radio  frequency
transmissions and emissions, and certain equipment used in connection therewith,
are regulated in the United States, Canada and throughout the rest of the world.
Regulatory  approvals  generally  must be obtained by the Company in  connection
with the manufacture and sale of its products, and by wireless service providers
to operate the  Company's  products.  The United States  Federal  Communications
Commission (the "FCC") and regulatory  authorities  abroad  constantly review RF
emission  issues  and  promulgate  standards  based  on  such  reviews.  If more
stringent RF emission regulations are adopted, the Company and its OEM customers
may be required to alter the manner in which radio  signals are  transmitted  or
otherwise alter the equipment  transmitting such signals, which could materially
adversely affect the Company's  products and markets.  The enactment by federal,
state, local or international governments of new laws or regulations or a change
in the  interpretation of existing  regulations could also materially  adversely
affect the market for the Company's  products.  Although recent  deregulation of
international  communications  industries  along  with  recent  radio  frequency
spectrum allocations made by the FCC have increased the potential demand for the
Company's  products by providing users of those products with  opportunities  to
establish  new  wireless  personal  communications  services,  there  can  be no
assurance that the trend toward deregulation and current regulatory developments
favorable to the promotion of new and expanded personal  communications services
will  continue  or that other  future  regulatory  changes  will have a positive
impact on the Company.  The increasing  demand for wireless  communications  has
exerted pressure on regulatory  bodies worldwide to adopt new standards for such
products,  generally following extensive  investigation of and deliberation over
competing  technologies.  The  delays  inherent  in this  governmental  approval
process have in the past caused,  and may in the future cause, the cancellation,
postponement or rescheduling of the  installation of  communications  systems by
the  Company's  OEM  customers.  These  delays have had in the past,  and in the
future  may have,  a  material  adverse  effect on the sale of  products  by the
Company to such OEM customers.

     Environmental  Regulations.  The  Company is subject to a variety of local,
state and federal governmental  regulations relating to the storage,  discharge,
handling,  emission,  generation,  manufacture  and  disposal  of toxic or other
hazardous  substances  used to manufacture the Company's  products.  The Company
believes that it is currently in  compliance in all material  respects with such
regulations  and that it has obtained  all  necessary  environmental  permits to
conduct its business. Nevertheless, the failure to comply with current or future
regulations  could result in the imposition of substantial fines on the Company,
suspension of production, alteration of its manufacturing processes or cessation
of operations.  Compliance  with such  regulations  could require the Company to
acquire expensive remediation  equipment or to incur substantial  expenses.  Any
failure by the Company to control the use,  disposal,  removal or storage of, or
to adequately  restrict the discharge of, or assist in the cleanup of, hazardous
or toxic  substances,  could  subject  the Company to  significant  liabilities,
including joint and several liability under

                                       27

<PAGE>


certain  statutes. The imposition of such liabilities could materially adversely
affect  the  Company's  business, financial condition and results of operations.
See "Business--Manufacturing."

     Year 2000 Compliance. Many installed computer programs were written using a
two digit date field  rather  than a four digit  field to define the  applicable
year.  Such computer  programs  utilizing a two digit date field may recognize a
date using "00" as the year 1900 rather than the year 2000.  The Year 2000 Issue
could  potentially  result  in  a  system  failure  or  miscalculations  causing
disruptions of operations,  including among other things, a temporary  inability
to  process  transactions,  send  invoices  or  engage in other  similar  normal
business  activities.  The Company has identified Year 2000 Issues in certain of
its  internal  operating  systems  and is in the  process  of  installing  a new
computer   software  system  which  will  increase   operational  and  financial
efficiencies  and information  analysis.  The new enterprise  system  recognizes
dates beyond  December 31, 1999 and  addresses the  substantial  position of the
Year 2000 Issue that impact the Company. The cost of this project, as it relates
to the Year  2000  Issue,  is not  expected  to have a  material  effect  on the
operations of the Company and will be funded through  operating cash flows.  The
Company has not completed an audit of its remaining internal systems or products
with respect to Year 2000 Issues.

     Management  of  Growth;  Dependence  on Key  Personnel.  The  growth in the
Company's  business  has  placed,  and is  expected  to  continue  to  place,  a
significant strain on the Company's  personnel,  management and other resources.
The Company's ability to manage any future growth effectively will require it to
attract,  train,  motivate,  manage and retain new  employees  successfully,  to
integrate  new  employees  into its overall  operations  and in  particular  its
manufacturing  operations, to retain the continued service of its key technical,
marketing and management personnel,  and to continue to improve its operational,
financial  and  management   information  systems.   Although  the  Company  has
employment contracts with several of its executive officers, these agreements do
not obligate such  individuals to remain in the  employment of the Company.  The
Company does not maintain key person life  insurance on any of its key technical
personnel.  The competition  for such personnel is intense,  and the loss of key
employees   could  have  a  material   adverse   effect  on  the  Company.   See
"Business--Employees" and "Management."

     Volatility  of Stock Price.  The market price of the shares of Common Stock
has  recently  been and is likely to  continue  to be  highly  volatile,  and is
affected  significantly  by  factors  such  as  fluctuations  in  the  Company's
operating  results,  announcements  of technological  innovations,  new customer
contracts or new products by the Company or its  competitors,  announcements  by
the  Company's  customers  regarding  their  business or  prospects,  changes in
analysts'  expectations,   governmental  regulatory  action,  developments  with
respect to patents or proprietary  rights,  general market  conditions and other
factors.  In  addition,  the  stock  market  has from  time to time  experienced
significant  price and volume  fluctuations  that are unrelated to the operating
performance of particular  companies.  The market price of the Company's  Common
Stock has fluctuated  substantially  during fiscal 1998, from a low of $10.75 on
April 1, 1997 to a high of $66.375 on October 1, 1997. On May 18, 1998, the last
reported  sale  price of the Common  Stock as  reported  on the Nasdaq  National
Market was  $16.125.  See "Market  for  Registrant's  Common  Equity and Related
Stockholder Matters."

     Pending  Litigation.  Since December 23, 1997, a number of complaints  have
been filed  against the Company and certain of its officers in the Federal Court
for the Northern  District of California  that allege  violations of the federal
securities  laws.  Similar  complaints have been filed in California state court
that allege violations of California state securities laws and California common
law. The  complaints  have been  consolidated  in the federal and state  courts,
respectively.  The plaintiffs in both the federal and state lawsuits  purport to
represent a class of persons who purchased the Company's  securities  during the
period of July 17, 1997 through October 23, 1997. The complaints allege that the
Company and certain of its officers  misled the investing  public  regarding the
financial  prospects of the Company.  The Company  believes that the allegations
are  completely  without  merit  and  will  vigorously  defend  itself.  Certain
provisions of the Company's  Certificate of  Incorporation  and  indemnification
agreements  between the Company and its officers  require the Company to advance
to such officers  ongoing legal  expenses of defending the suits and may require
the Company to indemnify them against judgments  rendered on certain claims. The
Company expects to incur  significant legal expenses on its behalf and on behalf
of such officers in connection with this litigation. In addition, defending this
litigation  has resulted and will likely  continue to result in the diversion of
management's attention from the day to day operations of the

                                       28

<PAGE>


Company's business.  Although the Company does not believe that it or any of its
officers  has engaged in any  wrongdoing,  there can be no  assurance  that this
stockholder  litigation  will be resolved  in the  Company's  favor.  An adverse
result,  settlement or prolonged litigation could have a material adverse effect
on the Company's business, financial condition or results of operations.

     Shareholder  Rights  Plan;  Issuance  of  Preferred  Stock.  The  Board  of
Directors of the Company adopted a Shareholder  Rights Plan in October 1996 (the
"Rights  Plan").  Pursuant to the Rights Plan,  the Board declared a dividend of
one Preferred  Stock Purchase Right per share of Common Stock (the "Rights") and
each such Right has an exercise price of $126.00.  The Rights become exercisable
upon the occurrence of certain  events,  including the  announcement of a tender
offer or exchange offer for the Company's  Common Stock or the  acquisition of a
specified  percentage  of the  Company's  Common  Stock  by a third  party.  The
exercise  of the  Rights  could  have  the  effect  of  delaying,  deferring  or
preventing a change in control of the Company,  including,  without  limitation,
discouraging  a proxy  contest or making more  difficult  the  acquisition  of a
substantial  block of the Company's  Common Stock.  These  provisions could also
limit the price that investors  might be willing to pay in the future for shares
of the Company's Common Stock. The Board of Directors has the authority to issue
up to 5,000,000  shares of  undesignated  Preferred  Stock and to determine  the
powers,   preferences  and  rights  and  the   qualifications,   limitations  or
restrictions   granted  to  or  imposed  upon  any  wholly  unissued  shares  of
undesignated  Preferred Stock and to fix the number of shares  constituting  any
series and the designation of such series, without any further vote or action by
the  Company's  stockholders.  For example,  in  connection  with the  Company's
Shareholder  Rights Plan,  the Board of Directors  designated  20,000  shares of
Preferred Stock as Series A Participating  Preferred Stock although none of such
shares have been  issued.  The  Preferred  Stock  could be issued  with  voting,
liquidation,  dividend  and other  rights  superior  to those of the  holders of
Common Stock. The issuance of Preferred Stock under certain  circumstances could
have the effect of delaying,  deferring or preventing a change in control of the
Company.


ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA

     The  Company's   consolidated  financial  statements  and  the  independent
auditors' report appear on pages F-1 through F-15 of this Report.


ITEM  9. CHANGES  IN  AND  DISAGREEMENTS  WITH  ACCOUNTANTS  ON  ACCOUNTING  AND
         FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

     Not applicable.

                                       29

<PAGE>


                                    PART III


ITEM 10. DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE REGISTRANT

     The information required by this item concerning the Company's directors is
incorporated by reference to the sections captioned  "Election of Directors" and
"Section  16(a)  Beneficial  Ownership  Reporting  Compliance"  contained in the
Company's Proxy Statement  related to the 1998 Annual Meeting of Stockholders to
be held  June 26,  1998,  to be filed by the  Company  with the  Securities  and
Exchange  Commission  within 120 days of the end of the  Company's  fiscal  year
pursuant  to  General  Instruction  G(3) of Form 10-K (the  "Proxy  Statement").
Certain information  required by this item concerning  executive officers is set
forth in Part I of this  Report  in  "Business--Management"  and  certain  other
information  required by this item is incorporated by reference from the section
captioned "Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance" contained in
the Proxy Statement.


ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

     The  information  required by this item is incorporated by reference to the
section captioned  "Executive  Compensation and Other Matters"  contained in the
Proxy Statement.


ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT

     The  information  required by this item is incorporated by reference to the
sections  captioned   "Security  Ownership  of  Certain  Beneficial  Owners  and
Management"  and  "Record  Date;  Outstanding  Shares"  contained  in the  Proxy
Statement.


ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS

     The  information  required by this item is incorporated by reference to the
sections    captioned    "Compensation    Committee   Interlocks   and   Insider
Participation" and "Certain Transactions" contained in the Proxy Statement.

                                       30

<PAGE>


                                     PART IV


ITEM 14. EXHIBITS, FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES AND REPORTS ON FORM 8-K.

     (a)(1) Financial Statements

     The  following   consolidated  financial  statements  are  incorporated  by
reference in Item 8 of this Report:

         Independent Auditors' Report

         Consolidated Balance Sheets, March 31, 1998 and 1997

         Consolidated  Statements  of  Operations  for the years ended March 31,
         1998, 1997 and 1996

         Consolidated  Statements  of  Stockholders'  Equity for the years ended
         March 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996

         Consolidated  Statements  of Cash Flows for the years  ended  March 31,
         1998, 1997 and 1996

         Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

     (a)(2) Financial Statement Schedules

         Schedule  II--Valuation and Qualifying  Accounts and Reserves (see page
         S-1)

         Independent Auditors' Report (see page F-2)

     Schedules  not  listed  above have been  omitted  because  the  information
required to be set forth therein is not  applicable or is shown in the financial
statements or notes thereto.

     (a)(3) Exhibits


   3.1(4)         Restated Articles of Incorporation of Registrant.
   3.4(1)         Bylaws of Registrant.
   3.5(14)        Certificate of Incorporation of Registrants.
   3.6(15)        Bylaws of Registrant.
   4.1(11)        Amended and  Restated  Preferred  Shares  Rights  Agreement of
                  January 15,  1997,  between  the  Registrant  and  ChaseMellon
                  Shareholder Services,  L.L.C., as amended,  including the form
                  of Rights  Certificate and the  Certificate of  Determination,
                  the Summary of Rights attached thereto as Exhibits A, B and C,
                  respectively.
   4.1.1(11)      Letter  Agreement to amend Preferred  Shares Rights  Agreement
                  dated as of January 15, 1997 between the  Registrant  and Kopp
                  Investment Advisors, Inc.
  10.1(1)         Form of Indemnification Agreement with directors and officers.
  10.2(8)         1992 Stock Plan, as amended.
  10.3(8)         1994 Employee  Stock  Purchase  Plan, as amended,  and form of
                  agreement thereunder.
  10.4(8)         1994 Director Option Plan and form of agreement thereunder.
  10.5(1)         Amended and Restated Registration Rights Agreement dated as of
                  August 9, 1993 by and among Registrant and certain individuals
                  and entities named therein.
  10.6.1(1)       Lease between  Registrant and Portola Land Company dated March
                  28, 1984, as amended.
  10.6.2(1)       Lease  between  Registrant  and 465 Mountain  View  Properties
                  Incorporated dated May 15, 1990, as amended.
  10.6.3(1)       Standard  Industrial  Lease-Multiple-Tenant  between  American
                  Microwave Technology, Inc. and Enterprise Business Center-Brea
                  dated December 19, 1990.
  10.7.1(1)       Business Loan Agreement between  Registrant and Silicon Valley
                  Bank dated May 21, 1992, as amended,  and ancillary  documents
                  thereto.
  10.7.2(1)       Amendment to Business Loan  Agreement  between  Registrant and
                  Silicon Valley Bank dated June 27, 1994.
  10.7.3(14)      Amended  and  Restated   Business   Loan   Agreement   between
                  Registrant and Silicon Valley Bank dated February 11, 1997 and
                  ancillary documents thereto.
  10.8+(1)        Supply  Agreement  between  Registrant  and  Northern  Telecom
                  Canada Limited dated July 16, 1993.
  10.9+(1)        Agreement  between  Registrant and Matra  Communication  dated
                  March 24, 1993.

                                       31

<PAGE>


  10.10.1+(1)     Agreement   among    Registrant   and   Ericsson   GE   Mobile
                  Communications,  Inc.,  Ericsson  Radio  Access  AB,  Ericsson
                  Mobile  Communications  AB and Ericsson Radio Systems AB dated
                  July 21, 1993 (collectively "Ericsson").
  10.10.2+(1)     Addendum to Agreement among Registrant and Ericsson dated June
                  29, 1994.
  10.10.3+(1)     Addendum to Agreement among Registrant and Ericsson dated June
                  29, 1994.
  10.11+(2)       Hardware  Development  Agreement  dated  July 6, 1994  between
                  Northern Telecom Limited and Registrant.
  10.12+(3)       Hardware Development  Agreement dated October 18, 1994 between
                  Northern Telecom Limited and Registrant.
  10.13+(4)       Hardware Supply Agreement dated April 6, 1995 between Northern
                  Telecom Limited and Registrant
  10.14(4)        Employment  Agreement dated January 6, 1992 between Registrant
                  and C. Woodrow Rea, Jr.
  10.15(4)        Employment  Agreement dated January 6, 1992 between Registrant
                  and David S. Wisherd.
  10.16(5)        Purchase  and  Sale  Agreement   between   Metropolitan   Life
                  Insurance Company and Registrant.
  10.17+(6)       Development and Supply Agreement between QUALCOMM Incorporated
                  and Registrant.
  10.18+(7)       Purchasing Agreement between Airnet Communications Corporation
                  and Registrant.
  10.19(8)        Employment   Agreement   between  Garrett  A.  Garrettson  and
                  Registrant.
  10.20(8)        Employment   Agreement   between   Stephen  B.  Greenspan  and
                  Registrant.
  10.21(9)        Term Loan Agreement between Silicon Valley Bank and Registrant
  10.22(10)       Lease Agreement dated November 19, 1996 between the Registrant
                  and SPEC (CA) QRS 12-20, Inc.
  10.23(10)       Bill of Sale dated November 19, 1996 by the Registrant to SPEC
                  (CA) QRS 12-20, Inc.
  10.24(12)       Employment   Agreement   dated  March  11,  1997  between  the
                  Registrant and Bruce R. Wright.
  10.25(12)       Letter  Agreement  dated  November 6, 1996 between the Company
                  and Edward Supplee.
  10.26(13)       Stock  Option   Agreement  dated  November  26,  1997  between
                  Registrant and Garrett A. Garrettson.
  10.27(13)       Stock  Option   Agreement  dated  November  26,  1997  between
                  Registrant and Garrett A. Garrettson.
  10.28(13)       Stock  Option   Agreement  dated  November  26,  1997  between
                  Registrant and Garrett A. Garrettson.
  10.29(13)       Stock Option Agreement dated March 24, 1997 between Registrant
                  and Bruce Wright.
  10.30(13)       Stock Option Agreement dated March 20, 1997 between Registrant
                  and Michael Morrione.
  10.31(13)       Stock Option Agreement dated March 20, 1997 between Registrant
                  and Stephen B. Greenspan.
  10.32(15)       Form of Indemnification Agreement with directors and officers.
  10.33(16)       1998 Nonstatutory Stock Option Plan.
  10.34           1998 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
  10.35           Lease Agreement dated December 19, 1997 between Registrant and
                  Stanford Ranch I, LLC.
  10.36(17)       Stock  Option  Agreement  dated  December 15, 1997 between the
                  Registrant and John Rottenburg.
  10.37           First  Amendment  to Lease dated  February  19,  1998  between
                  Registrant and Stanford Ranch I, LLC.
  23.1            Consent of KPMG Peat Marwick LLP.
  24.1            Power of Attorney (included on page 41).
  27.1            Financial Data Schedule.

- ---------------

  +  Confidential  treatment  has been  requested  or  granted  with  respect to
     certain  portions  of  this  exhibit.  Omitted  portions  have  been  filed
     separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission.
 (1) Incorporated by reference to the  Registration  Statement on Form S-1 (File
     No.  33-79952)  as  declared  effective  by  the  Securities  and  Exchange
     Commission August 2, 1994.
 (2) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended October 1, 1994.
 (3) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended December 31, 1994.

                                       32

<PAGE>


 (4) Incorporated  by reference to the  Registrant's  Annual Report on Form 10-K
     for the fiscal year ended March 31, 1995.
 (5) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended July 1, 1995.
 (6) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended September 30, 1995.
 (7) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended December 30, 1995.
 (8) Incorporated   by  reference  to  exhibits  filed  with  the   Registrant's
     Registration  Statement on Form S-8 (File No.  333-38561) as filed with the
     Securities and Exchange Commission on October 23, 1997.
 (9) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended June 29, 1996
(10) Incorporated by reference to the  Registrant's  Form 8-K dated November 19,
     1996.
(11) Incorporated by reference to exhibits filed with Registrant's  Registration
     Statement on Form 8-A (File No. 000-24360) as filed with the Securities and
     Exchange Commission on January 17, 1997.
(12) Incorporated by reference to exhibits filed with Registrant's Annual Report
     on Form 10-K for the year ended March 31, 1997.
(13) Incorporated   by   reference   to   exhibits   filed   with   Registrant's
     Post-Effective  Amendment No. 1 to the  Registration  Statement on Form S-8
     (File No.  333-25435) as filed with the Securities and Exchange  Commission
     on October 21, 1997.
(14) Incorporated  by reference to exhibits  filed with  Registrant's  Quarterly
     Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 28, 1997.
(15) Incorporated  by  reference  to exhibits  filed with  Registrant's  Current
     Report on Form 8-K dated October 10, 1997.
(16) Incorporated by reference to exhibits filed with Registrant's  Registration
     Statement on Form S-8 (File No. 333-49081) as filed with the Securities and
     Exchange Commission on April 1, 1998.
(17) Incorporated by reference to exhibits filed with Registrant's  Registration
     Statement on Form S-8 (File No. 333-53079) as filed with the Securities and
     Exchange Commission on May 19, 1998.

     (b)  Reports  on Form 8-K. The Company did not file any reports on Form 8-K
during the three months ended March 31, 1998.

     (c) Exhibits. See Item 14(a)(3) above.

     (d) Financial Statement Schedules. See Item 14(a)(2) above.

                                       33

<PAGE>


                                   SIGNATURES

     Pursuant  to the  requirements  of  Section  13 or 15(d) of the  Securities
Exchange Act of 1934, as amended,  the Registrant has duly caused this Report to
be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.


                                        SPECTRIAN CORPORATION

                                        By: /s/ Garrett A. Garrettson
                                          -------------------------------------
                                          Garrett A. Garrettson
                                          President,   Chief  Executive  Officer
                                          and Director


Date: May 21, 1998


                                POWER OF ATTORNEY

     KNOW ALL  PERSONS  BY THESE  PRESENTS,  that each  person  whose  signature
appears  below  constitutes  and  appoints  Garrett A.  Garrettson  and Bruce R.
Wright, and each of them, his true and lawful attorneys-in-fact and agents, each
with  full  power  of  substitution  and  resubstitution,  to  sign  any and all
amendments (including  post-effective  amendments) to this Annual Report on Form
10-K and to file the same,  with all  exhibits  thereto and other  documents  in
connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto
said attorneys-in-fact and agents, and each of them, full power and authority to
do and perform each and every act and thing  requisite  and necessary to be done
in connection therewith, as fully to all intents and purposes as he or she might
or  could  do  in  person,   hereby  ratifying  and  confirming  all  that  said
attorneys-in-fact  and agents,  or their  substitute or  substitutes,  or any of
them, shall do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.

<TABLE>
     Pursuant to the  requirements  of the  Securities  Exchange Act of 1934, as
amended, this Report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of
the Registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated:

<CAPTION>
       Signature                               Title                           Date
- ------------------------------   --------------------------------------   -------------
<S>                              <C>                                        <C>
/s/ Garrett A. Garrettson        President, Chief Executive Officer and     May 21, 1998
- ---------------------------      Director (Principal Executive Officer)
  Garrett A. Garrettson

   /s/ Bruce R. Wright           Executive Vice President, Finance and      May 21, 1998
- ---------------------------      Administration, Chief Financial
    Bruce R. Wright              Officer and Secretary (Principal
                                 Financial and Accounting Officer)

   /s/ James A. Cole             Director                                   May 21, 1998
- ---------------------------
     James A. Cole

   /s/ Robert C. Wilson          Director                                   May 21, 1998
- ---------------------------
    Robert C. Wilson

    /s/ Eric A. Young            Director                                   May 21, 1998
- ---------------------------
      Eric A. Young

    /s/ Martin Cooper            Director                                   May 21, 1998
- ---------------------------
      Martin Cooper

   /s/ Charles D. Kissner        Director                                   May 21, 1998
- ---------------------------
      Charles D. Kissner
</TABLE>

                                       34

<PAGE>


                          INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


                                                                         Page
                                                                        -----
Independent Auditors' Report ........................................    F-2
Consolidated Balance Sheets .........................................    F-3
Consolidated Statements of Operations ...............................    F-4
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows ...............................    F-5
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity ..........    F-6
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements ..........................    F-7

                                       F-1

<PAGE>


                          Independent Auditors' Report


The Board of Directors and Stockholders
Spectrian Corporation:


     We have audited the accompanying  consolidated  balance sheets of Spectrian
Corporation  (the Company) and  subsidiaries  as of March 31, 1998 and 1997, and
the related consolidated statements of operations, stockholders' equity and cash
flows for each of the years in the  three-year  period ended March 31, 1998.  In
connection with our audits of the  consolidated  financial  statements,  we also
have audited the  financial  statement  schedule as listed in Item 14(a).  These
consolidated  financial  statements and the financial statement schedule are the
responsibility of the Company's management.  Our responsibility is to express an
opinion on these  consolidated  financial  statements  and  financial  statement
schedule based on our audits.

     We conducted  our audits in accordance  with  generally  accepted  auditing
standards.  Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement.  An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements.  An audit also includes
assessing the  accounting  principles  used and  significant  estimates  made by
management,  as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

     In our opinion,  the consolidated  financial  statements  referred to above
present fairly, in all material  respects,  the financial  position of Spectrian
Corporation  and  subsidiaries as of March 31, 1998 and 1997, and the results of
their  operations  and their cash flows for each of the years in the  three-year
period ended March 31, 1998, in conformity  with generally  accepted  accounting
principles.  Also in our opinion, the related financial statement schedule, when
considered in relation to the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a
whole,  presents  fairly in all material  respects,  the  information  set forth
therein.


                                                        /s/KPMG Peat Marwick LLP

Mountain View, California
April 22, 1998

                                       F-2

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
                           CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
                        (In thousands, except share data)

                                                                March 31,
                                                         ----------------------
                                                           1998          1997
                                                         ---------    ---------
Assets
Current assets:
 Cash and cash equivalents ...........................   $  31,460    $   6,240
 Short-term investments ..............................      68,128         --
 Accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful
   accounts of $376 and $365, respectively ...........      21,123       15,825
 Inventories .........................................      15,362       17,301
 Prepaid expenses and other current assets ...........       6,202        1,806
                                                         ---------    ---------
   Total current assets ..............................     142,275       41,172
Property and equipment, net ..........................      32,776       25,461
                                                         ---------    ---------
                                                         $ 175,051    $  66,633
                                                         =========    =========
Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity
Current liabilities:
 Accounts payable ....................................   $  10,456    $   8,101
 Accrued liabilities .................................      12,981        7,421
 Current portion of debt obligations .................       1,360        1,588
                                                         ---------    ---------
   Total current liabilities .........................      24,797       17,110
Debt obligations, net of current portion .............       5,912        7,057
                                                         ---------    ---------
   Total liabilities .................................      30,709       24,167
                                                         ---------    ---------
Stockholders' equity:
 Common stock, $0.001 par value, 20,000,000 shares
   authorized; 10,904,077 and 8,265,230 shares
   issued and outstanding, respectively ..............          10            8
 Additional paid-in capital ..........................     146,827       53,387
 Deferred compensation expense .......................        (609)        --
 Unrealized gains on investments .....................         121         --
 Accumulated deficit .................................      (2,007)     (10,929)
                                                         ---------    ---------
   Total stockholders' equity ........................     144,342       42,466
                                                         ---------    ---------
Commitments and contingencies
                                                         ---------    ---------
                                                         $ 175,051    $  66,633
                                                         =========    =========

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

                                       F-3

<PAGE>


<TABLE>
                                        SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
                                         CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
                                         (In thousands, except per share data)

<CAPTION>
                                                                                   Year ended March 31,
                                                                    -------------------------------------------------
                                                                      1998                1997                 1996
                                                                    --------            --------             --------
<S>                                                                 <C>                 <C>                  <C>     
Revenues ...............................................            $168,798            $ 88,252             $ 72,113
                                                                    --------            --------             --------
Costs and expenses:
 Cost of product sales .................................             132,684              65,322               45,355
 Research and development ..............................              18,644              17,230               14,548
 Selling, general and administrative ...................              13,014               9,299                7,450
                                                                    --------            --------             --------
                                                                     164,342              91,851               67,353
                                                                    --------            --------             --------
   Operating income (loss) .............................               4,456              (3,599)               4,760
Interest income (expense), net .........................               3,335                (392)                 889
Other income, net ......................................               1,530                --                   --
                                                                    --------            --------             --------
   Income (loss) before income taxes ...................               9,321              (3,991)               5,649
Income tax expense .....................................                 399                --                    169
                                                                    --------            --------             --------
   Net income (loss) ...................................            $  8,922            $ (3,991)            $  5,480
                                                                    ========            ========             ========
Net income (loss) per share:
   Basic ...............................................            $   0.90            $  (0.49)            $   0.71
   Diluted .............................................            $   0.83            $  (0.49)            $   0.66
Shares used in computing per share amounts:
   Basic ...............................................               9,881               8,150                7,684
   Diluted .............................................              10,701               8,150                8,363

<FN>
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements
</FN>
</TABLE>

                                                                 F-4

<PAGE>


<TABLE>
                                          SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
                                           CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                                                      (In thousands)

<CAPTION>
                                                                                         Year ended March 31,
                                                                           ----------------------------------------------
                                                                             1998               1997               1996
                                                                           --------           --------           --------
<S>                                                                        <C>                <C>                <C>     
Cash flows from operating activities:
 Net income (loss) ...............................................         $  8,922           $ (3,991)          $  5,480
 Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash
   provided by (used for) operating activities:
   Gain on sale of subsidiary ....................................           (1,530)              --                 --
   Depreciation and amortization .................................            9,761              6,574              4,793
   Stock compensation expense ....................................              609                182                (49)
   Tax benefit associated with stock options .....................             --                 --                  138
   Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
    Accounts receivable ..........................................          (10,051)            (3,845)            (1,360)
    Inventories ..................................................              362            (10,072)            (2,444)
    Prepaid expenses and other assets ............................             (412)            (1,386)               (26)
    Accounts payable .............................................            3,141              1,137              2,897
    Accrued liabilities ..........................................            5,811              3,301                173
                                                                           --------           --------           --------
      Net cash provided by (used for) operating activities .......           16,613             (8,100)             9,602
                                                                           --------           --------           --------
Cash flows from investing activities:
 Proceeds (purchases) of short-term investments, net .............          (68,008)             3,000              9,107
 Proceeds from sale of subsidiary ................................            4,016               --                 --
 Proceeds from sale of property ..................................             --               16,414               --
 Purchase of property and equipment ..............................          (17,953)           (16,321)           (28,182)
                                                                           --------           --------           --------
      Net cash provided by (used for) investing activities .......          (81,945)             3,093            (19,075)
                                                                           --------           --------           --------
Cash flows from financing activities:
 Proceeds from real estate loan ..................................             --                2,917               --
 Proceeds from bank debt and equipment financing .................             --               18,000               --
 Repayments of debt and capital lease obligations ................           (1,672)           (12,272)              --
 Proceeds from sales of common stock, net ........................           92,224              1,439              2,216
                                                                           --------           --------           --------
      Net cash provided by financing activities ..................           90,552             10,084              2,216
                                                                           --------           --------           --------
      Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents .......           25,220              5,077             (7,257)
      Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year ...............            6,240              1,163              8,420
                                                                           --------           --------           --------
      Cash and cash equivalents, end of year .....................         $ 31,460           $  6,240           $  1,163
                                                                           ========           ========           ========
Supplemental disclosures of cash flow information:
 Cash paid during the year for interest ..........................         $    457           $    660           $     31
 Taxes paid during the year ......................................         $    952           $   --             $   --
 Noncash investing and financing activities:
   Equipment recorded under capital lease obligations ............         $    307           $   --             $   --
   Deferred stock option compensation ............................         $  1,218           $   --             $   (425)
   Unrealized gain on investments ................................         $    121           $   --             $   --

<FN>
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements
</FN>
</TABLE>

                                                                 F-5

<PAGE>


<TABLE>
                                              SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
                                         CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
                                                 (In thousands except share data)

<CAPTION>
                                                                                       Unrealized
                                         Common Stock                       Deferred      Gains                        Total
                                   -----------------------    Paid-In    Compensation  (Losses) on    Accumulated  Stockholders'
                                     Shares       Amount      Capital       Expense     Investments     Deficit        Equity
                                   ----------   ----------   ----------    ----------    ----------    ----------    ----------
<S>                                 <C>         <C>          <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>       
Balances as of March 31, 1995 ....  7,155,800   $        7   $   50,020    $     (558)   $        5    $  (12,418)   $   37,056
Exercise of stock options ........    761,778            1        1,160          --            --            --           1,161
Employee stock purchase plan .....     96,947         --          1,055          --            --            --           1,055
Deferred stock option
 compensation ....................       --           --           (425)          425          --            --            --
Stock option compensation ........       --           --           --             (49)         --            --             (49)
Tax benefit associated with
 stock options ...................       --           --            138          --            --            --             138
Unrealized losses on investments .       --           --           --            --              (3)         --              (3)
Net income .......................       --           --           --            --            --           5,480         5,480
                                   ----------   ----------   ----------    ----------    ----------    ----------    ----------
Balances as of March 31, 1996 ....  8,014,525            8       51,948          (182)            2        (6,938)       44,838
Exercise of stock options ........    114,671         --            276          --            --            --             276
Employee stock purchase plan .....    136,034         --          1,163          --            --            --           1,163
Stock option compensation ........       --           --           --             182          --            --             182
Unrealized losses on investments .       --           --           --            --              (2)         --              (2)
Net loss .........................       --           --           --            --            --          (3,991)       (3,991)
                                   ----------   ----------   ----------    ----------    ----------    ----------    ----------
Balances as of March 31, 1997 ....  8,265,230            8       53,387          --            --         (10,929)       42,466
Exercise of stock options ........    431,470         --          5,589          --            --            --           5,589
Employee stock purchase plan .....    207,377         --          1,604          --            --            --           1,604
Public offering, net of
 $4,969 expenses .................  2,000,000            2       85,029          --            --            --          85,031
Deferred stock option
 compensation ....................       --           --          1,218        (1,218)         --            --            --
Stock compensation expense .......       --           --           --             609          --            --             609
Unrealized gain on investments ...       --           --           --            --             121          --             121
Net income .......................       --           --           --            --            --           8,922         8,922
                                   ----------   ----------   ----------    ----------    ----------    ----------    ----------
Balances as of March 31, 1998 .... 10,904,077   $       10   $  146,827    $     (609)   $      121    $   (2,007)   $  144,342
                                   ==========   ==========   ==========    ==========    ==========    ==========    ==========

<FN>
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements
</FN>
</TABLE>

                                                                 F-6

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


1. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

   Principles of Consolidation

     The accompanying  consolidated financial statements include the accounts of
the Company and its wholly and  majority  owned  subsidiaries.  All  significant
intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

   Revenue Recognition

     The Company recognizes  revenue upon shipment and concurrently  accrues for
expected warranty expenses.  Repair and service revenues are recognized when the
service is performed.

   Concentration of Credit Risk and Fair Value of Financial Instruments

     The Company performs ongoing credit evaluations of its customers' financial
condition and generally does not require collateral on accounts receivable. When
required,  the Company  maintains  allowances  for credit losses and such losses
have been within management's expectations.

     The recorded amounts of financial instruments approximate their fair market
values.

   Cash Equivalents and Short-Term Investments

     The Company  considers all liquid  investments with an original maturity of
three months or less to be cash  equivalents.  The cash  equivalents  consist of
commercial paper as of March 31, 1998.

     The Company has  classified its  investments in certain debt  securities as
"available-for-sale,"  and records such  investments at fair market value,  with
unrealized  gains and losses reported as a separate  component of  stockholders'
equity.  Interest income is recorded using an effective  interest rate, with the
associated  premium or discount  amortized to interest income. At March 31, 1998
and 1997, the fair value of the Company's investments approximated cost.

   Inventories

     Inventories are stated at the lower of first-in, first-out cost or market.

   Property and Equipment

     Property and equipment are stated at cost.  Depreciation  and  amortization
are computed using the  straight-line  method over the estimated useful lives of
the respective  assets,  generally  three to five years.  Assets  recorded under
capital leases and leasehold improvements are amortized on a straight-line basis
over the  shorter  of the  lease  terms  or the  estimated  useful  lives of the
respective assets.

   Income Taxes

     Income taxes are recorded  using the asset and liability  method.  Deferred
tax assets  and  liabilities  are  recognized  for the  future tax  consequences
attributable to differences  between the financial statement carrying amounts of
existing  assets and  liabilities  and their  respective tax bases and operating
loss and tax credit  carryforwards.  Deferred  tax assets  and  liabilities  are
measured  using  enacted tax rates  expected  to apply to taxable  income in the
years in which those  temporary  differences  are  expected to be  recovered  or
settled.  The effect on deferred tax assets and  liabilities  of a change in tax
rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment  date. A
valuation  allowance  is  recorded  against  deferred  tax  assets  where  their
realization is more likely than not.

   Per Share Computations

     The Company adopted Statement of Financial  Accounting  Standards  ("SFAS")
No. 128, "Earnings Per Share" effective December 28, 1997. SFAS No. 128 requires
presentation of basic earnings per share ("EPS") and, for companies with complex
capital structures,  diluted EPS. Basic EPS excludes dilution and is computed by
dividing net income  available to common  stockholders  by the  weighted-average
number of  common  shares  outstanding  for the  period.  Diluted  EPS  includes
dilution and net income per share is

                                       F-7

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

            NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (Continued)

computed  using  the  weighted  average  number of common  and  dilutive  common
equivalent  shares  outstanding  during the  period.  Common  equivalent  shares
include the effect of the  exercise of stock  options.  For the year ended March
31, 1997,  common  equivalent  shares were not included for the  calculation  of
diluted EPS as they were considered  antidilutive.  The Company has restated net
income  (loss)  per  share  for  all  periods   presented  in  the  accompanying
consolidated financial statements to reflect net income (loss) per share on both
a basic and a diluted basis.

<TABLE>
     A reconciliation of the basic and diluted per share calculations follows:

<CAPTION>
                                                         Year ended                          Year ended
                                                       March 31, 1998                      March 31, 1997
                                                 ------------------------------    ---------------------------------
                                                                       Per                                 Per
                                                  Net                 Share          Net                   Share
                                                 Income    Shares     Amount         Loss      Shares      Amount
(In thousands, except per share data)            ------    ------     ------         ----      ------      ------
<S>                                              <C>         <C>       <C>          <C>          <C>        <C>      
Basic ......................................     $ 8,922     9,881     $   0.90     $(3,991)     8,150      $  (0.49)
Effect of dilutive securities ..............        --         820      --             --         --         --
                                                 -------   -------     -----        -------    -------      -----
Diluted ....................................     $ 8,922    10,701     $   0.83     $(3,991)     8,150      $  (0.49)
                                                 =======   =======     =====        =======    =======      =====
</TABLE>

                                                        Year ended
                                                      March 31, 1996
                                           ----------------------------------
                                                                        Per
                                            Net                        Share
                                           Income       Shares         Amount
(In thousands, except per share data)      ------       ------         ------
Basic ...............................      $5,480       7,684        $   0.71
Effect of dilutive securities .......        --           679            --
                                           ------       ------         -----
Diluted .............................      $5,480       8,363        $   0.66
                                           ======       ======         =====

   Use of Estimates in the Preparation of Financial Statements

     The  preparation  of financial  statements  in  conformity  with  generally
accepted  accounting  principles  requires  management  to  make  estimates  and
assumptions  that affect the  reported  amounts of assets and  liabilities,  the
disclosure of contingent  assets and  liabilities,  revenues and expenses during
the  reporting  period.  The most  significant  of these relate to the extent of
inventory  obsolescence,  the allowance  for doubtful  accounts and the warranty
accrual. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

   Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation

     The  Company  continues  to account  for its stock  option  plans using the
intrinsic value method.

   Impairment of Long-Lived Assets and Long-Lived Assets to be Disposed Of

     The Company reviews long-lived assets and certain identifiable  intangibles
for impairment  whenever  events or changes in  circumstances  indicate that the
carrying  amount  of an  asset  may  not be  recoverable.  If  such  assets  are
considered  to be impaired,  the  impairment to be recognized is measured by the
amount by which the carrying amount of the asset exceeds its fair value. To date
the Company has made no such adjustments.


2. CASH EQUIVALENTS AND SHORT-TERM INVESTMENTS

     Available-for-sale securities at March 31, 1998 and 1997 were as follows:


                                                          1998             1997
                                                         -------         -------
                                                              (In thousands)
  Commercial paper .............................         $63,341         $  --
  Repurchase agreements ........................            --             4,830
  U.S. government securities ...................          28,158             128
                                                         -------         -------
                                                         $91,499         $ 4,958
                                                         =======         =======

                                       F-8

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

            NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (Continued)

     As of March 31, 1998 and 1997 the estimated  fair value of each  investment
approximated  the  amortized  cost and,  therefore,  there  were no  significant
unrealized gains or losses.  At March 31, 1998 and 1997 all securities held were
due in less than one year and were classified as follows (in thousands):


                                                               March 31,
                                                       -------------------------
                                                        1998              1997
                                                       -------           -------
  Cash equivalents .........................           $23,371           $ 4,958
  Short-term investments ...................            68,128              --
                                                       -------           -------
                                                       $91,499           $ 4,958
                                                       =======           =======


3. BALANCE SHEET COMPONENTS

     Balance  sheet  components  at March 31,  1998 and 1997 are as follows  (in
thousands):


                                                                  March 31,
                                                           ---------------------
                                                            1998          1997
                                                           -------       -------
     Inventories:
        Raw materials ..............................       $ 7,395       $ 9,315
        Work in progress ...........................         5,538         6,699
        Finished goods .............................         2,429         1,287
                                                           -------       -------
                                                           $15,362       $17,301
                                                           =======       =======
     Property and equipment:
        Machinery and equipment ....................       $51,091       $37,181
        Land, building and improvements ............         2,829         2,822
        Furniture and fixtures .....................         1,382         1,376
        Leasehold improvements .....................         1,633           867
                                                           -------       -------
                                                            56,935        42,246
        Less accumulated depreciation and
          amortization .............................        24,159        16,785
                                                           -------       -------
                                                           $32,776       $25,461
                                                           =======       =======
     Accrued liabilities:
        Employee compensation and benefits .........       $ 2,958       $ 3,772
        Warranty ...................................         7,326         1,940
        Deferred revenue and other .................         2,697         1,709
                                                           -------       -------
                                                           $12,981       $ 7,421
                                                           =======       =======


4. DEBT AND LEASE COMMITMENTS

   Lines of Credit

     The  Company  maintains a revolving  line of credit  under a master  credit
agreement with a bank. The master credit agreement  contains  certain  financial
covenants  and  certain  restrictions  on  other  indebtedness  and  payment  of
dividends.  The line of credit,  secured by a majority of the Company's  assets,
expires on  December 1, 1998,  bears  interest  at the bank's  prime  rate,  and
provides for  borrowings  and letters of credit  aggregating  up to  $10,000,000
based on a specified percentage of eligible accounts receivable. As of March 31,
1998,  the Company was in compliance  with all but its  quarterly  profitability
financial covenant for which the Company has received a waiver from its bank. As
of March 31,  1998,  the Company had  $10,000,000  available  under this line of
credit with no borrowings outstanding.

                                       F-9

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

            NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (Continued)

   Equipment and Real Estate Loans

     In January 1997, the Company borrowed $6,000,000 secured by certain capital
equipment.  Under the terms of the agreement,  the Company is required to make a
series of uneven monthly  principal  payments  through January 2002 ranging from
$42,000 to $136,000,  plus  interest at a rate equal to the  Treasury  Rate plus
2.75%, and must maintain  certain minimum working  capital,  net worth and other
specific ratios for which the Company was in compliance as of March 31, 1998.

     In March 1997,  through means of a limited  liability  company in which the
Company is a majority owner, the Company purchased a 39,000 square foot building
and  secured a real estate  loan with an  institutional  lender in the amount of
$3,200,000 of which  $2,917,000  was received by the Company in fiscal 1997. The
loan has an initial maturity date of April 2002 with an option to be extended to
April 2007.  The Company  makes  monthly  payments of principal  and interest in
equal  amounts  which are  amortized  over two  hundred  forty  months  with the
remaining  principal  balance due on the maturity  date.  The interest rate is a
variable interest rate set at the LIBOR rate plus 3.25%.

     Future  minimum debt  principal  payments under these loans as of March 31,
1998  aggregated   $7,272,000  including   $1,360,000,   $1,300,000,   $889,000,
$1,472,000,  and $178,000 for the fiscal years 1999,  2000, 2001, 2002 and 2003,
respectively, and $2,073,000, thereafter.

   Lease Commitments

     During fiscal 1997, the Company sold its principal  facilities in Sunnyvale
for  $16,414,000,  and  leased the  facilities  back under a lease that has been
classified  as an operating  lease.  The lease  expires in November 2011 and the
quarterly  rent payments are subject to Consumer  Price Index  adjustments  on a
tri-annual basis beginning in November 1999.

     In 1998, the Company entered into operating  leases for an ancillary 40,000
square foot  manufacturing  facility in Rocklin,  California  and a 7,750 square
foot engineering design center in Quincy,  Illinois.  The Rocklin facility has a
sixty-two  month lease term  commencing  in June 1998 and expiring in July 2003.
The Quincy lease has a twelve-month lease term and expires in March 1999.

     The  Company   leases  these   facilities  and  certain   equipment   under
noncancelable  operating  leases.  Future  minimum  lease  payments  under these
noncancelable  operating  leases as of March  31,  1998  aggregated  $26,494,000
including $2,202,000,  $2,317,000, $2,317,000, $2,311,000 and $2,310,000 for the
fiscal years 1999,  2000,  2001, 2002 and 2003,  respectively  and  $15,037,000,
thereafter.  Rent expense was approximately  $2,530,000,  $819,000, and $778,000
for the years ended March 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively.


5. STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY

   Reincorporation

     On September 11, 1997,  the Company's  shareholders  approved the Company's
reincorporation  in the state of Delaware,  providing for 20,000,000  authorized
shares of Common Stock and 5,000,000  authorized shares of Preferred Stock, both
with par values of $.001 per share. On October 3, 1997, the  reincorporation  in
the state of Delaware was effected.  The accompanying  financial statements have
been restated to give effect to the reincorporation.

   Preferred Stock

     The Board of Directors has the authority to issue up to 5,000,000 shares of
undesignated preferred stock and to determine the powers, preferences and rights
and the qualifications,  limitations or restrictions  granted to or imposed upon
any wholly unissued shares of undesignated preferred stock and to fix the

                                      F-10

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

            NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (Continued)

number of shares  constituting  any series and the  designation  of such series,
without any further vote or action by the Company's  stockholders.  The Board of
Directors  has  designated   20,000  shares  of  preferred  stock  as  Series  A
Participating Preferred Stock, although none of such shares have been issued.

   Public Offering

     On August 20, 1997,  the Company  completed a public  offering of 2,000,000
shares of common stock and received net proceeds of $85,031,000.

   Stock Option Plans

     The Company has adopted  stock option  plans,  (the  "Plans"),  pursuant to
which the  Company's  Board of  Directors  may grant  stock  options to selected
employees, directors, officers and consultants of the Company. Stock options are
generally  granted with an exercise  price equal to the fair market value of the
Company's stock at the date of grant.  The options  generally have 10-year terms
and vest 25%  after one year from the  grant  date  with the  remaining  options
vesting pro rata over the following 36 months.

     A total of 186,380  shares of Common Stock have been  reserved for issuance
under the 1992 Stock Plan as of March 31, 1998.  Under the 1994 Director  Option
Plan, 25,000 shares were granted during fiscal 1998, and 35,000 shares of Common
Stock were reserved for issuance as of March 31, 1998.

     Outside of the 1992  Stock  Plan and the 1994  Director  Option  Plan,  two
officers  and one  employee  of the  Company  were  granted a combined  total of
390,000  options  during fiscal 1997, at exercise  prices  ranging from $9.50 to
$14.50,  which are subject to the same vesting schedule as that of the Company's
1992 Stock Plan. In fiscal 1998,  one officer and two  employees  were granted a
combined total of 90,000 options outside of the Plans at exercise prices ranging
from $16.88 to $56.38, which are subject to the same vesting schedule as that of
the 1992 Stock Plan.

     In January 1998 the Company adopted the 1998 Nonstatutory Stock Option Plan
under which 400,000 shares were  reserved.  Under this plan,  certain  employees
were granted  stock options with  exercise  prices  ranging from $6.59 to $16.36
that were below the $17.25  fair  market  value of the stock on the day of grant
and were subject to a six-month vesting schedule. Stock compensation of $609,000
was recorded for these options in the fourth  quarter of fiscal 1998. A total of
226,312 shares were reserved for issuance as of March 31, 1998.

                                      F-11

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

            NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (Continued)

     The following table summarizes  option activity under the Company's various
plans:


                                                                        Weighted
                                                                         Average
                                            Available for               Exercise
                                                Grant       Options      Price
                                             ----------    ----------    ------
Outstanding as of March 31, 1995 ..........   1,263,728     1,625,942    $ 4.34
   Granted ................................    (444,743)      444,743     23.98
   Exercised ..............................        --        (761,791)     1.52
   Canceled ...............................     372,306      (372,306)     4.13
                                             ----------    ----------    ------
Outstanding as of March 31, 1996 ..........   1,191,291       936,588     16.03
   Additional shares reserved .............     390,000          --        --
   Granted at fair market value ...........  (1,790,746)    1,790,746     14.91
   Granted in excess of fair market value .    (250,000)      250,000     14.50
   Exercised ..............................        --        (114,671)     2.50
   Canceled ...............................   1,124,874    (1,124,874)    19.69
                                             ----------    ----------    ------
Outstanding as of March 31, 1997 ..........     665,419     1,726,753    $13.18
Additional shares reserved ................     500,000          --        --
   Granted ................................    (855,755)      855,755     25.91
   Exercised ..............................        --        (431,511)    12.87
   Canceled ...............................     138,028      (138,028)    17.45
                                             ----------    ----------    ------
Outstanding as of March 31, 1998 ..........     447,692     2,024,005    $18.34
                                             ==========    ==========    ======


     Using  the  Black-Scholes  Option-Pricing  Model,  the per  share  weighted
average fair market value of stock options  granted  during fiscal 1998,  fiscal
1997 and fiscal 1996 were $18.34, $9.41 and $17.69, respectively, on the date of
grant.  Assumptions  used with the  Black-Scholes  Option-Pricing  Model were as
follows:  for  fiscal  1998,  a  stock  price  volatility  of 83%,  no  expected
dividends,  an average  risk-free  interest rate of 5.6% and an average expected
option  term of 4.5 years;  and for both fiscal  1997 and fiscal  1996,  a stock
price volatility of 80%, no expected  dividends,  an average risk-free  interest
rate of 6.0% and an average expected option term of 4.3 years.

                                      F-12

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

            NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (Continued)

<TABLE>
     The following tables summarize  information about stock options outstanding
at March 31, 1998:

<CAPTION>
                                       Weighted
                                       Average       Weighted                      Weighted
                        Number        Remaining       Average        Number        Average
   Range of          Outstanding     Contractual     Exercise     Exercisable      Exercise
Exercise Prices        Options           Life          Price        Options         Price
- -----------------   -------------   -------------   ----------   -------------   -----------
<S>                     <C>               <C>        <C>             <C>          <C>     
$ 0.20 -  6.59          149,402           8.6        $   5.46        38,957       $   2.28
  7.00 -  9.50          337,380           8.6            9.37       109,375           9.12
 10.00 - 14.38          219,540           9.0           14.04        44,327          13.85
 14.50 - 14.50          606,890           7.9           14.50       243,140          14.50
 16.25 - 21.25          294,593           9.6           18.52        12,549          18.92
 21.38 - 43.31          295,000           8.9           31.13        43,751          22.86
 43.50 - 64.13          121,200           9.5           54.60           --             --
                      ---------                                     -------
                      2,024,005           8.7        $  18.34       492,099       $  13.13
                      =========                                     =======
</TABLE>

   Employee Stock Purchase Plan

     In May 1994,  the  Board of  Directors  approved  the 1994  Employee  Stock
Purchase  Plan (the  "Purchase  Plan")  which  permitted  eligible  employees to
purchase the Company's  Common Stock through  payroll  deductions.  The Purchase
Plan consisted of consecutive and overlapping  24-month offering  periods,  each
divided into four 6-month purchase periods.  The purchase price of the shares in
the  Purchase  Plan was 85% of the lower of the fair market  value of the Common
Stock  at the  beginning  of the  offering  period  or the end of each  purchase
period.  The  Company  reserved  a total of 475,000  shares of common  stock for
issuance  under this plan,  of which no  remaining  shares of Common  Stock were
available  for  issuance as of March 31,  1998.  During the year ended March 31,
1998,  there were 207,377  shares  acquired under the Purchase Plan at per share
prices ranging from $6.59 to $16.36.

     Under SFAS No. 123, pro forma  compensation cost is calculated for the fair
market value of the employees'  purchase rights.  The per share weighted average
fair market value of those purchase  rights granted in fiscal 1998,  fiscal 1997
and  fiscal  1996,   respectively,   was  $4.32,  $5.14  and  $6.54,  using  the
Black-Scholes  Option-Pricing Model with the following  assumptions:  for fiscal
1998, a stock price volatility of 83%, no expected dividends, risk free interest
rate of 5.6% and an expected  term of 0.5 years;  for fiscal 1997, a stock price
volatility of 80%, no expected dividends,  a risk free interest rate of 6.0% and
an expected term of 0.9 years;  and for fiscal 1996, a stock price volatility of
80%, no expected  dividends,  a risk free  interest rate of 6.0% and an expected
term of 0.8 years.

   Pro Forma Fair Value Information

<TABLE>
     The  Company  accounts  for its stock  options  using the  intrinsic  value
method. Had the Company determined  compensation cost based on the fair value at
the grant date for its stock  options  under SFAS No.  123,  the  Company's  net
income (loss) and related per share amounts would have been altered as indicated
in the pro forma amounts indicated below:

<CAPTION>
                                                      1998                1997               1996
                                               -----------------   -----------------   ----------------
<S>                                              <C>                 <C>                 <C>         
Net income (loss) ..........   As reported       $   8,922,000       $  (3,991,000)      $  5,480,000
                               Pro forma         $  (1,870,000)      $  (8,018,000)      $  2,339,000
Net income (loss) per share:
   Basic ...................   As reported       $        0.90       $       (0.49)      $       0.71
                               Pro forma         $       (0.19)      $       (0.98)      $       0.30
   Diluted .................   As reported       $        0.83       $       (0.49)      $       0.66
                               Pro forma         $       (0.19)      $       (0.98)      $       0.28
</TABLE>

                                                  F-13

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

            NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (Continued)

     Pro forma net income  (loss)  reflects  only the options  granted in fiscal
1998, 1997 and 1996. Therefore, the full impact of calculating compensation cost
for stock  options  under  SFAS No.  123 is not  reflected  in the pro forma net
income (loss) amounts  presented  above because  compensation  cost is reflected
over the options' vesting period of four years and compensation cost for options
granted prior to April 1, 1995 is not considered.


6. INCOME TAXES

     Income  tax  expense  for the years  ended  March 31,  1998,  1997 and 1996
differs from the amount  computed by applying the federal income tax rate of 34%
to  pretax  income  (loss)  from  operations  as a result of the  following  (in
thousands):


                                                       Year ended March 31,
                                                  -----------------------------
                                                   1998       1997       1996
                                                  -------    -------    -------
        Federal tax (benefit) at statutory rate   $ 3,189    $(1,357)   $ 1,921
        Utilization of net operating loss
         carryforwards ........................    (3,314)      --       (1,921)
        Unutilized net operating losses .......      --        1,337       --
        Alternative minimum tax ...............       183       --          169
        FSC tax expense .......................       215       --         --
        Unrealized benefit from LLC loss ......        44       --         --
        Other .................................        82         20       --
                                                  -------    -------    -------
        Income tax expense ....................   $   399    $  --      $   169
                                                  =======    =======    =======


     The Company is entitled to a deduction  for federal and state tax  purposes
with respect to employees' early  disposition of stock acquired through employee
stock options.  The net reduction in taxes  otherwise  payable arising from that
deduction has been credited to Common Stock.

     The tax  effects of  temporary  differences  that give rise to  significant
portions of the  deferred tax assets and  liabilities  are  presented  below (in
thousands):


                                                                March 31,
                                                         ----------------------
                                                           1998          1997
                                                         --------      --------
         Deferred tax assets:
            Various accruals and reserves ...........    $  6,999      $  2,921
            Net operating loss carryforwards ........       7,986        10,266
            Credit carryforwards ....................       6,604         4,721
                                                         --------      --------
               Total gross deferred tax assets ......      21,589        17,908
               Less valuation allowance .............     (20,642)      (17,313)
                                                         --------      --------
               Net deferred tax assets ..............    $    947      $    595
                                                         ========      ========
         Deferred tax liabilities:
            Property and equipment depreciation
             differences ............................    $   (947)     $   (595)
                                                         --------      --------
               Total gross deferred tax liabilities..        (947)         (595)
                                                         --------      --------
               Net deferred tax assets ..............    $   --            --
                                                         ========      ========


     A valuation  allowance  is provided  due to  uncertainties  relating to the
realization of deferred tax assets.

     As of March 31, 1998, the Company has a net operating loss  carryforward of
$23 million for federal  income tax  purposes.  The Company has research  credit
carryforwards of approximately $2 million and

                                      F-14

<PAGE>


                     SPECTRIAN CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

            NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (Continued)

$1.9 million for federal and California  income tax purposes,  respectively.  If
not utilized,  these  carryforwards  will expire in various amounts beginning in
1999.   The  Company  also  has  an  investment  tax  credit   carryforward   of
approximately  $2.3 million for  California  income tax purposes  which,  if not
utilized,  will expire in 2004 through 2006. Included in the deferred tax assets
is approximately  $13.3 million of assets relating to the tax benefit associated
with stock option exercises which will be credited to equity when realized.


7. MAJOR CUSTOMERS

     The  following  table  summarizes  the annual  percentage  contribution  to
revenues by customers when sales to such customers exceeded 10% of such revenues
in fiscal  1998,  1997 and 1996,  and the amounts due from these  customers as a
percentage of total accounts receivable as of March 31, 1998 and 1997, follows:


                                                  Percentage of
                                                  Total Accounts
                                                   Receivable
                        Percentage of Revenues         as of
                         Year Ended March 31,       March 31,
                       ------------------------   --------------
                        1998     1997     1996     1998     1997
                       ------   ------   ------   ------   -----
  Customer A .........  57%      63%      58%       41%      51%
  Customer B .........  22%      12%      17%       33%      27%
  Customer C .........  14%      --       --         8%      --


     Customers  A,  B  and  C are major companies in the wireless infrastructure
equipment industry. Company A has an equity investment in Company B.

     Export sales as a percentage of revenues were as follows:


                              Year ended March 31,
                            -------------------------
                             1998     1997      1998
                            ------   ------   -------
  Canada ................    49%       57%       51%
  Europe ................    20%       13%       20%
  Korea .................    26%        2%       --
  Other .................    --         1%        1%
                             --        --        --
  Total exports .........    95%       73%       72%
                             ==        ==        ==

8. LITIGATION

     Since December 23, 1997, a number of complaints have been filed against the
Company  and  certain of its  officers  in the  Federal  Court for the  Northern
District of California that allege  violations of the federal  securities  laws.
Similar  complaints  have been  filed in  California  state  court  that  allege
violations of California  state  securities laws and California  common law. The
complaints have been consolidated in the federal and state courts, respectively.
The  plaintiffs  in both the federal and state  lawsuits  purport to represent a
class of persons who  purchased the  Company's  securities  during the period of
July 17, 1997 through  October 23, 1997. The complaints  allege that the Company
and certain of its officers misled the investing  public regarding the financial
prospects  of the  Company.  The  Company  believes  that  the  allegations  are
completely without merit and will vigorously defend itself.

                                      F-15

<PAGE>


                                   SCHEDULE II


                 VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS AND RESERVES

                                 (in thousands)


                             Balance at   Additions                  Balance at
    Allowance for Doubtful    Beginning   Charged to                  End of
 Accounts and Sales Returns:  of Period     Income     Deductions     Period
 ---------------------------  ---------     ------     ----------     ------
          1998                  $365        $ 24          $ 13          $376
          1997                  $339        $ 36          $ 10          $365
          1996                  $454        $ 14          $129          $339

                                       S-1

<PAGE>

                                INDEX TO EXHIBITS


                                                                    Sequentially
  Exhibits                                                         Numbered Page
  --------                                                         -------------
    3.1(4)        Restated   Articles  of  Incorporation  of
                  Registrant.
    3.4(1)        Bylaws of Registrant.
    3.5(14)       Certificate    of     Incorporation     of
                  Registrants.
    3.6(15)       Bylaws of Registrant.
    4.1(11)       Amended  and  Restated   Preferred  Shares
                  Rights  Agreement  of  January  15,  1997,
                  between  the  Registrant  and  ChaseMellon
                  Shareholder Services,  L.L.C., as amended,
                  including  the form of Rights  Certificate
                  and the Certificate of Determination,  the
                  Summary  of  Rights  attached  thereto  as
                  Exhibits A, B and C, respectively.
    4.1.1(11)     Letter Agreement to amend Preferred Shares
                  Rights  Agreement  dated as of January 15,
                  1997  between  the   Registrant  and  Kopp
                  Investment Advisors, Inc.
   10.1(1)        Form  of  Indemnification  Agreement  with
                  directors and officers.
   10.2(8)        1992 Stock Plan, as amended.
   10.3(8)        1994  Employee  Stock  Purchase  Plan,  as
                  amended, and form of agreement thereunder.
   10.4(8)        1994  Director  Option  Plan  and  form of
                  agreement thereunder.
   10.5(1)        Amended and Restated  Registration  Rights
                  Agreement  dated as of  August  9, 1993 by
                  and   among    Registrant    and   certain
                  individuals and entities named therein.
   10.6.1(1)      Lease between  Registrant and Portola Land
                  Company dated March 28, 1984, as amended.
   10.6.2(1)      Lease between  Registrant and 465 Mountain
                  View Properties Incorporated dated May 15,
                  1990, as amended.
   10.6.3(1)      Standard Industrial  Lease-Multiple-Tenant
                  between  American  Microwave   Technology,
                  Inc. and Enterprise  Business  Center-Brea
                  dated December 19, 1990.
   10.7.1(1)      Business Loan Agreement between Registrant
                  and  Silicon  Valley  Bank  dated  May 21,
                  1992, as amended,  and ancillary documents
                  thereto.
   10.7.2(1)      Amendment  to  Business   Loan   Agreement
                  between Registrant and Silicon Valley Bank
                  dated June 27, 1994.
   10.7.3(14)     Amended   and   Restated   Business   Loan
                  Agreement  between  Registrant and Silicon
                  Valley  Bank dated  February  11, 1997 and
                  ancillary documents thereto.
   10.8+(1)       Supply  Agreement  between  Registrant and
                  Northern Telecom Canada Limited dated July
                  16, 1993.
   10.9+(1)       Agreement  between  Registrant  and  Matra
                  Communication dated March 24, 1993.
   10.10.1+(1)    Agreement among Registrant and Ericsson GE
                  Mobile   Communications,   Inc.,  Ericsson
                  Radio   Access   AB,    Ericsson    Mobile
                  Communications   AB  and  Ericsson   Radio
                  Systems   AB   dated    July   21,    1993
                  (collectively "Ericsson").
   10.10.2+(1)    Addendum to Agreement among Registrant and
                  Ericsson dated June 29, 1994.
   10.10.3+(1)    Addendum to Agreement among Registrant and
                  Ericsson dated June 29, 1994.
   10.11+(2)      Hardware Development  Agreement dated July
                  6, 1994 between  Northern  Telecom Limited
                  and Registrant.
   10.12+(3)      Hardware   Development   Agreement   dated
                  October 18, 1994 between  Northern Telecom
                  Limited and Registrant.
   10.13+(4)      Hardware  Supply  Agreement dated April 6,
                  1995 between  Northern Telecom Limited and
                  Registrant
   10.14(4)       Employment Agreement dated January 6, 1992
                  between Registrant and C. Woodrow Rea, Jr.
   10.15(4)       Employment Agreement dated January 6, 1992
                  between Registrant and David S. Wisherd.
   10.16(5)       Purchase   and  Sale   Agreement   between
                  Metropolitan  Life  Insurance  Company and
                  Registrant.


<PAGE>


                                                                    Sequentially
  Exhibits                                                         Numbered Page
  --------                                                         -------------
   10.17+(6)      Development and Supply  Agreement  between
                  QUALCOMM Incorporated and Registrant.
   10.18+(7)      Purchasing    Agreement   between   Airnet
                  Communications Corporation and Registrant.
   10.19(8)       Employment  Agreement  between  Garrett A.
                  Garrettson and Registrant.
   10.20(8)       Employment  Agreement  between  Stephen B.
                  Greenspan and Registrant.
   10.21(9)       Term Loan Agreement between Silicon Valley
                  Bank and Registrant
   10.22(10)      Lease  Agreement  dated  November 19, 1996
                  between the  Registrant  and SPEC (CA) QRS
                  12-20, Inc.
   10.23(10)      Bill of Sale dated  November  19,  1996 by
                  the  Registrant  to SPEC  (CA) QRS  12-20,
                  Inc.
   10.24(12)      Employment  Agreement dated March 11, 1997
                  between  the   Registrant   and  Bruce  R.
                  Wright.
   10.25(12)      Letter  Agreement  dated  November 6, 1996
                  between the Company and Edward Supplee.
   10.26(13)      Stock Option  Agreement dated November 26,
                  1997  between  Registrant  and  Garrett A.
                  Garrettson.
   10.27(13)      Stock Option  Agreement dated November 26,
                  1997  between  Registrant  and  Garrett A.
                  Garrettson.
   10.28(13)      Stock Option  Agreement dated November 26,
                  1997  between  Registrant  and  Garrett A.
                  Garrettson.
   10.29(13)      Stock  Option  Agreement  dated  March 24,
                  1997 between Registrant and Bruce Wright.
   10.30(13)      Stock  Option  Agreement  dated  March 20,
                  1997   between   Registrant   and  Michael
                  Morrione.
   10.31(13)      Stock  Option  Agreement  dated  March 20,
                  1997  between  Registrant  and  Stephen B.
                  Greenspan.
   10.32(15)      Form  of  Indemnification  Agreement  with
                  directors and officers.
   10.33(16)      1998 Nonstatutory Stock Option Plan.
   10.34          1998 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
   10.35          Lease  Agreement  dated  December 19, 1997
                  between  Registrant  and Stanford Ranch I,
                  LLC.
   10.36(17)      Stock Option  Agreement dated December 15,
                  1997  between  the   Registrant  and  John
                  Rottenburg.
   10.37          First  Amendment  to Lease dated  February
                  19, 1998 between  Registrant  and Stanford
                  Ranch I, LLC.
   23.1           Consent of KPMG Peat Marwick LLP.
   24.1           Power of Attorney (included on page 41).
   27.1           Financial Data Schedule.

- ------------
  +  Confidential  treatment  has been  requested  or  granted  with  respect to
     certain  portions  of  this  exhibit.  Omitted  portions  have  been  filed
     separately with the Securities and Exchange Commission.
 (1) Incorporated by reference to the  Registration  Statement on Form S-1 (File
     No.  33-70594)  as  declared  effective  by  the  Securities  and  Exchange
     Commission December 13, 1993.
 (2) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for quarter ended October 1, 1994.
 (3) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for quarter ended December 31, 1994.
 (4) Incorporated  by reference to the  Registrant's  Annual Report on Form 10-K
     for fiscal year ended March 31, 1995.
 (5) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended July 1, 1995.
 (6) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended September 30, 1995.
 (7) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended December 30, 1995.
 (8) Incorporated   by  reference  to  exhibits  filed  with  the   Registrant's
     Registration  Statement on Form S-8 (File No.  333-38561) as filed with the
     Securities and Exchange Commission on October 23, 1997.


<PAGE>


 (9) Incorporated by reference to the Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q
     for the quarter ended June 29, 1996.
(10) Incorporated by reference to the  Registrant's  Form 8-K dated November 19,
     1996.
(11) Incorporated by reference to exhibits filed with Registrant's  Registration
     Statement on Form 8-A (File No. 000-24360) as filed with the Securities and
     Exchange Commission on January 17, 1997.
(12) Incorporated by reference to exhibits filed with Registrant's Annual Report
     on Form 10-K for the year ended March 31, 1997.
(13) Incorporated   by   reference   to   exhibits   filed   with   Registrant's
     Post-Effective  Amendment No. 1 to the  Registration  Statement on Form S-8
     (File No.  333-25435) as filed with the Securities and Exchange  Commission
     on October 21, 1997.
(14) Incorporated  by reference to exhibits  filed with  Registrant's  Quarterly
     Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 28, 1997.
(15) Incorporated  by  reference  to exhibits  filed with  Registrant's  Current
     Report on Form 8-K dated October 10, 1997.
(16) Incorporated by reference to exhibits filed with Registrant's  Registration
     Statement on Form S-8 (File No. 333-49081) as filed with the Securities and
     Exchange Commission on April 1, 1998.
(17) Incorporated by reference to exhibits filed with Registrant's  Registration
     Statement  on Form S-8 (File No.  333- ) as filed with the  Securities  and
     Exchange Commission on May 19, 1998.




                              SPECTRIAN CORPORATION

                        1998 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN


         The following  constitute  the  provisions  of the 1998 Employee  Stock
Purchase Plan of Spectrian Corporation.

         1.  Purpose.  The  purpose of the Plan is to provide  employees  of the
Company and its Designated  Subsidiaries  with an opportunity to purchase Common
Stock of the Company through accumulated payroll deductions. It is the intention
of the Company to have the Plan qualify as an  "Employee  Stock  Purchase  Plan"
under  Section  423 of the  Internal  Revenue  Code of  1986,  as  amended.  The
provisions  of the Plan,  accordingly,  shall be  construed  so as to extend and
limit participation in a manner consistent with the requirements of that section
of the Code.

         2. Definitions.

                  (a)  "Board" shall mean the Board of Directors of the Company.

                  (b)  "Code" shall mean the Internal  Revenue Code of 1986,  as
amended.

                  (c) "Common Stock" shall mean the Common Stock of the Company.

                  (d)  "Company"  shall  mean  Spectrian   Corporation  and  any
Designated Subsidiary of the Company.

                  (e)  "Compensation"  shall mean all base  straight  time gross
earnings,   commissions,   overtime,  shift  premium,   incentive  compensation,
incentive payments, and bonuses.

                  (f) "Designated  Subsidiary"  shall mean any Subsidiary  which
has been  designated  by the Board from time to time in its sole  discretion  as
eligible to participate in the Plan.

                  (g) "Employee" shall mean any individual who is an Employee of
the Company for tax purposes whose  customary  employment with the Company is at
least  twenty (20) hours per week and more than five (5) months in any  calendar
year. For purposes of the Plan, the employment  relationship shall be treated as
continuing  intact  while  the  individual  is on sick  leave or other  leave of
absence  approved by the Company.  Where the period of leave exceeds 90 days and
the individual's right to reemployment is not guaranteed either by statute or by
contract, the employment  relationship shall be deemed to have terminated on the
91st day of such leave.

                  (h)  "Enrollment  Date"  shall  mean  the  first  day of  each
Offering Period.

                  (i)  "Exercise  Date" shall mean the last  Trading Day of each
Purchase Period.

<PAGE>


                  (j) "Fair Market Value" shall mean, as of any date,  the value
of Common Stock determined as follows:

                           (1) If the Common Stock is listed on any  established
stock exchange or a national  market system,  including  without  limitation the
Nasdaq National Market or The Nasdaq SmallCap Market of The Nasdaq Stock Market,
its Fair Market  Value  shall be the closing  sales price for such stock (or the
closing bid, if no sales were reported) as quoted on such exchange or system for
the last market  trading day on the date of such  determination,  as reported in
The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Board deems reliable, or;

                           (2) If the  Common  Stock is  regularly  quoted  by a
recognized  securities  dealer but  selling  prices are not  reported,  its Fair
Market  Value  shall be the mean of the  closing  bid and asked  prices  for the
Common Stock on the date of such  determination,  as reported in The Wall Street
Journal or such other source as the Board deems reliable, or;

                           (3) In the absence of an  established  market for the
Common Stock, the Fair Market Value thereof shall be determined in good faith by
the Board.

                  (k) "Offering Periods" shall mean the periods of approximately
twelve (12) months  during which an option  granted  pursuant to the Plan may be
exercised,  commencing on the first Trading Day on or after May 1 and November 1
of each year and  terminating  on the last  Trading  Day in the  periods  ending
twelve months later; provided, however, that the first Offering Period under the
Plan shall  commence  with the first  Trading Day on or after July 1, 1998,  and
shall end on the last Trading Day on or before April 30, 1998.  The duration and
timing of Offering Periods may be changed pursuant to Section 4 of this Plan.

                  (l) "Plan" shall mean this 1998 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

                  (m)  "Purchase  Price" shall mean 85% of the Fair Market Value
of a share of  Common  Stock on the  Enrollment  Date or on the  Exercise  Date,
whichever  is lower;  provided  however,  that,  in the event (i) the  Company's
shareholders  approve an increase in the number of shares available for issuance
under the Plan, (ii) all or a portion of such additional shares are to be issued
with  respect to one or more  Offering  Periods that are underway at the time of
such shareholder  approval ("New Shares"),  and (iii) the Fair Market Value of a
share of Common  Stock on the date of such  approval  (the  "Authorization  Date
FMV") is higher than the Fair Market Value on the  Enrollment  Date for any such
Offering  Period,  the Purchase Price with respect to New Shares shall be 85% of
the  Authorization  Date FMV or the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock
on the Exercise Date, whichever is lower.

                  (n) "Purchase  Period" shall mean the  approximately six month
period  commencing  after one  Exercise  Date and ending with the next  Exercise
Date,  except  that the first  Purchase  Period  of any  Offering  Period  shall
commence on the Enrollment Date and end with the

                                       -2-

<PAGE>


next Exercise Date; provided,  however, that the first Purchase Period under the
Plan shall  commence  with the first  Trading Day on or after July 1, 1998,  and
shall end on the last Trading Day on or before October 31, 1998.

                  (o) "Reserves" shall mean the number of shares of Common Stock
covered by each option under the Plan which have not yet been  exercised and the
number of shares of Common Stock which have been  authorized  for issuance under
the Plan but not yet placed under option.

                  (p)  "Subsidiary"  shall  mean  a  corporation,   domestic  or
foreign, of which not less than 50% of the voting shares are held by the Company
or a  Subsidiary,  whether or not such  corporation  now exists or is  hereafter
organized or acquired by the Company or a Subsidiary.

                  (q)  "Trading  Day" shall mean a day on which  national  stock
exchanges and the Nasdaq System are open for trading.

         3. Eligibility.

                  (a) Any  Employee  who shall be  employed  by the Company on a
given Enrollment Date shall be eligible to participate in the Plan.

                  (b)   Any   provisions   of   the   Plan   to   the   contrary
notwithstanding,  no Employee  shall be granted an option  under the Plan (i) to
the extent that, immediately after the grant, such Employee (or any other person
whose stock would be attributed to such Employee  pursuant to Section  424(d) of
the Code) would own capital stock of the Company and/or hold outstanding options
to  purchase  such  stock  possessing  five  percent  (5%) or more of the  total
combined  voting  power or  value of all  classes  of the  capital  stock of the
Company or of any  Subsidiary,  or (ii) to the extent  that his or her rights to
purchase  stock under all employee  stock  purchase plans of the Company and its
subsidiaries  accrues  at a rate  which  exceeds  twenty-five  thousand  dollars
($25,000)  worth of stock  (determined at the fair market value of the shares at
the time such option is granted) for each  calendar year in which such option is
outstanding at any time.

         4. Offering  Periods.  The Plan shall be  implemented  by  consecutive,
overlapping  Offering Periods with a new Offering Period commencing on the first
Trading Day on or after May 1 and November 1 of each year, or on such other date
as the Board shall  determine,  and continuing  thereafter  until  terminated in
accordance with Section 20 hereof;  provided,  however,  that the first Offering
Period under the Plan shall commence with the first Trading Day on or after July
1, 1998 and shall end on the last Trading Day on or before  April 30, 1998.  The
Board shall have the power to change the duration of Offering Periods (including
the  commencement  dates  thereof)  with  respect  to future  offerings  without
shareholder approval if such change is announced at least five (5) days prior to
the scheduled beginning of the first Offering Period to be affected thereafter.

                                       -3-

<PAGE>


         5. Participation.

                  (a) An eligible  Employee may become a participant in the Plan
by completing a subscription  agreement  authorizing  payroll  deductions in the
form of Exhibit A to this Plan and filing it with the Company's  payroll  office
prior to the applicable Enrollment Date.

                  (b) Payroll deductions for a participant shall commence on the
first payroll following the Enrollment Date and shall end on the last payroll in
the Offering  Period to which such  authorization  is applicable,  unless sooner
terminated by the participant as provided in Section 10 hereof.

         6. Payroll Deductions.

                  (a) At the time a  participant  files his or her  subscription
agreement, he or she shall elect to have payroll deductions made on each pay day
during the Offering  Period in an amount not exceeding  fifteen percent (15%) of
the  Compensation  which he or she  receives on each pay day during the Offering
Period.

                  (b) All payroll  deductions  made for a  participant  shall be
credited  to his or her  account  under the Plan and shall be  withheld in whole
percentages  only. A participant may not make any additional  payments into such
account.

                  (c) A participant may discontinue his or her  participation in
the Plan as provided in Section 10 hereof,  or may increase or decrease the rate
of his or her payroll  deductions  during the Offering  Period by  completing or
filing with the Company a new  subscription  agreement  authorizing  a change in
payroll  deduction rate. The Board may, in its  discretion,  limit the number of
participation  rate changes during any Offering Period. The change in rate shall
be effective with the first full payroll period following five (5) business days
after the Company's receipt of the new subscription agreement unless the Company
elects to process a given change in participation  more quickly. A participant's
subscription  agreement shall remain in effect for successive  Offering  Periods
unless terminated as provided in Section 10 hereof.

                  (d) Notwithstanding the foregoing,  to the extent necessary to
comply  with  Section   423(b)(8)  of  the  Code  and  Section  3(b)  hereof,  a
participant's  payroll  deductions  may be decreased to zero percent (0%) at any
time during a Purchase Period.  Payroll  deductions shall recommence at the rate
provided in such  participant's  subscription  agreement at the beginning of the
first Purchase Period which is scheduled to end in the following  calendar year,
unless terminated by the participant as provided in Section 10 hereof.

                                       -4-

<PAGE>


                  (e) At the time the option is exercised,  in whole or in part,
or at the time some or all of the  Company's  Common Stock issued under the Plan
is disposed of, the participant  must make adequate  provision for the Company's
federal, state, or other tax withholding  obligations,  if any, which arise upon
the exercise of the option or the  disposition of the Common Stock. At any time,
the Company may, but shall not be obligated to, withhold from the  participant's
compensation the amount necessary for the Company to meet applicable withholding
obligations, including any withholding required to make available to the Company
any tax  deductions or benefits  attributable  to sale or early  disposition  of
Common Stock by the Employee.

         7. Grant of Option.  On the  Enrollment  Date of each Offering  Period,
each eligible Employee participating in such Offering Period shall be granted an
option to purchase on each  Exercise  Date during such  Offering  Period (at the
applicable  Purchase  Price) up to a number of  shares of the  Company's  Common
Stock  determined by dividing such  Employee's  payroll  deductions  accumulated
prior to such Exercise Date and retained in the Participant's  account as of the
Exercise Date by the applicable Purchase Price;  provided that in no event shall
an Employee be permitted to purchase during each Purchase Period more than 5,000
shares of the  Company's  Common Stock  (subject to any  adjustment  pursuant to
Section  19), and provided  further that such  purchase  shall be subject to the
limitations  set forth in  Sections  3(b) and 12 hereof.  Exercise of the option
shall  occur as  provided  in  Section  8 hereof,  unless  the  participant  has
withdrawn pursuant to Section 10 hereof. The option shall expire on the last day
of the Offering Period.

         8. Exercise of Option.  Unless a participant withdraws from the Plan as
provided  in  Section 10 hereof,  his or her option for the  purchase  of shares
shall be exercised automatically on the Exercise Date, and the maximum number of
full shares  subject to option shall be purchased  for such  participant  at the
applicable  Purchase Price with the accumulated payroll deductions in his or her
account.  No  fractional  shares  shall be  purchased;  any  payroll  deductions
accumulated  in a  participant's  account which are not sufficient to purchase a
full share  shall be retained in the  participant's  account for the  subsequent
Purchase  Period or  Offering  Period,  subject  to earlier  with  drawal by the
participant  as provided in Section 10 hereof.  Any other  monies left over in a
participant's  account  after  the  Exercise  Date  shall  be  returned  to  the
participant. During a participant's lifetime, a participant's option to purchase
shares hereunder is exercisable only by him or her.

         9.  Delivery.  As promptly as  practicable  after each Exercise Date on
which a purchase of shares  occurs,  the Company  shall  arrange the delivery to
each  participant,  as  appropriate,  of a certificate  representing  the shares
purchased upon exercise of his or her option.

                                       -5-

<PAGE>


         10. Withdrawal.

                  (a) A  participant  may withdraw all but not less than all the
payroll  deductions  credited to his or her account and not yet used to exercise
his or her  option  under the Plan at any time by giving  written  notice to the
Company in the form of Exhibit B to this Plan. All of the participant's  payroll
deductions  credited  to his or her  account  shall be paid to such  participant
promptly after receipt of notice of withdrawal and such participant's option for
the Offering Period shall be  automatically  terminated,  and no further payroll
deductions for the purchase of shares shall be made for such Offering Period. If
a participant  withdraws from an Offering Period,  payroll  deductions shall not
resume at the beginning of the succeeding Offering Period unless the participant
delivers to the Company a new subscription agreement.

                  (b) A  participant's  withdrawal from an Offering Period shall
not have any effect upon his or her  eligibility  to  participate in any similar
plan which may  hereafter  be adopted by the Company or in  succeeding  Offering
Periods which commence after the  termination of the Offering  Period from which
the participant withdraws.

         11.  Termination of Employment.  Upon a participant's  ceasing to be an
Employee,  for any reason, he or she shall be deemed to have elected to withdraw
from the Plan and the payroll deductions credited to such participant's  account
during the  Offering  Period but not yet used to  exercise  the option  shall be
returned to such  participant or, in the case of his or her death, to the person
or persons  entitled  thereto  under Section 15 hereof,  and such  participant's
option   shall   be   automatically    terminated.    The   preceding   sentence
notwithstanding,  a  participant  who  receives  payment  in lieu of  notice  of
termination  of employment  shall be treated as continuing to be an Employee for
the  participant's  customary number of hours per week of employment  during the
period in which the participant is subject to such payment in lieu of notice.

         12. Interest.  No interest shall accrue on the payroll  deductions of a
participant in the Plan.

         13. Stock.

                  (a) Subject to adjustment  upon changes in  capitalization  of
the Company as provided  in Section 19 hereof,  the maximum  number of shares of
the Company's Common Stock which shall be made available for sale under the Plan
shall be 250,000 shares, plus an annual increase to be added on the first day of
the Company's  fiscal year  beginning in 1999 equal to the lesser of (i) 300,000
shares,  (ii) 2% of the  outstanding  shares on the last day of the prior fiscal
year such date or (iii) a lesser amount  determined by the Board. If, on a given
Exercise  Date,  the number of shares  with  respect to which  options are to be
exercised  exceeds  the  number of shares  then  available  under the Plan,  the
Company

                                       -6-

<PAGE>


shall make a pro rata allocation of the shares remaining  available for purchase
in as uniform a manner as shall be practicable  and as it shall  determine to be
equitable.

                  (b) The participant  shall have no interest or voting right in
shares covered by his option until such option has been exercised.

                  (c) Shares to be  delivered  to a  participant  under the Plan
shall  be  registered  in the  name  of the  participant  or in the  name of the
participant and his or her spouse.

         14.  Administration.  The Plan shall be  administered by the Board or a
committee  of members  of the Board  appointed  by the  Board.  The Board or its
committee  shall have full and  exclusive  discretionary  authority to construe,
interpret  and  apply the terms of the Plan,  to  determine  eligibility  and to
adjudicate all disputed claims filed under the Plan. Every finding, decision and
determination  made by the  Board or its  committee  shall,  to the full  extent
permitted by law, be final and binding upon all parties.

         15. Designation of Beneficiary.

                  (a)  A  participant  may  file  a  written  designation  of  a
beneficiary   who  is  to  receive  any  shares  and  cash,  if  any,  from  the
participant's  account under the Plan in the event of such partici  pant's death
subsequent  to an Exercise  Date on which the option is  exercised  but prior to
delivery to such participant of such shares and cash. In addition, a participant
may file a written  designation of a beneficiary who is to receive any cash from
the  participant's  account  under the Plan in the  event of such  participant's
death  prior to  exercise of the  option.  If a  participant  is married and the
designated  beneficiary is not the spouse, spousal consent shall be required for
such designation to be effective.

                  (b) Such  designation  of  beneficiary  may be  changed by the
participant  at any time by  written  notice.  In the  event  of the  death of a
participant  and in the absence of a beneficiary  validly  designated  under the
Plan who is living at the time of such  participant's  death,  the Company shall
deliver such shares and/or cash to the executor or  administrator  of the estate
of the participant,  or if no such executor or administrator  has been appointed
(to the knowledge of the Company),  the Company, in its discretion,  may deliver
such  shares  and/or  cash to the  spouse  or to any one or more  dependents  or
relatives of the participant, or if no spouse, dependent or relative is known to
the Company, then to such other person as the Company may designate.

         16.   Transferability.   Neither  payroll  deductions   credited  to  a
participant's account nor any rights with regard to the exercise of an option or
to  receive  shares  under the Plan may be  assigned,  transferred,  pledged  or
otherwise  disposed of in any way (other  than by will,  the laws of descent and
distribution or as provided in Section 15 hereof) by the  participant.  Any such
attempt at assignment,

                                       -7-

<PAGE>


transfer,  pledge or other disposition shall be without effect,  except that the
Company may treat such act as an  election  to  withdraw  funds from an Offering
Period in accordance with Section 10 hereof.

         17.  Use of  Funds.  All  payroll  deductions  received  or held by the
Company under the Plan may be used by the Company for any corporate purpose, and
the Company shall not be obligated to segregate such payroll deductions.

         18.  Reports.   Individual   accounts  shall  be  maintained  for  each
participant in the Plan.  Statements of account shall be given to  participating
Employees at least  annually,  which  statements  shall set forth the amounts of
payroll  deductions,  the Purchase Price, the number of shares purchased and the
remaining cash balance, if any.

         19.   Adjustments   Upon   Changes  in   Capitalization,   Dissolution,
Liquidation, Merger or Asset Sale.

                  (a) Changes in Capitalization.  Subject to any required action
by the shareholders of the Company,  the Reserves,  the maximum number of shares
each  participant may purchase each Purchase Period  (pursuant to Section 7), as
well as the price per share and the number of shares of Common Stock  covered by
each  option  under  the  Plan  which  has  not  yet  been  exercised  shall  be
proportionately  adjusted  for any  increase or decrease in the number of issued
shares of Common Stock resulting from a stock split,  reverse stock split, stock
dividend,  combination  or  reclassification  of the Common Stock,  or any other
increase or decrease in the number of shares of Common  Stock  effected  without
receipt of consideration by the Company;  provided,  however, that conversion of
any  convertible  securities  of the  Company  shall  not be deemed to have been
"effected  without receipt of  consideration".  Such adjustment shall be made by
the Board,  whose  determination  in that  respect  shall be final,  binding and
conclusive.  Except as expressly  provided herein, no issuance by the Company of
shares of stock of any class, or securities  convertible into shares of stock of
any class,  shall affect, and no adjustment by reason thereof shall be made with
respect to, the number or price of shares of Common Stock subject to an option.

                  (b) Dissolution or  Liquidation.  In the event of the proposed
dissolution or liquidation of the Company,  the Offering Period then in progress
shall be shortened by setting a new Exercise Date (the "New Exercise Date"), and
shall  terminate   immediately  prior  to  the  consummation  of  such  proposed
dissolution or  liquidation,  unless  provided  otherwise by the Board.  The New
Exercise Date shall be before the date of the Company's proposed  dissolution or
liquidation.  The Board shall notify each  participant in writing,  at least ten
(10)  business days prior to the New Exercise  Date,  that the Exercise Date for
the participant's  option has been changed to the New Exercise Date and that the
participant's option shall be exercised  automatically on the New Exercise Date,
unless prior to such date the participant has withdrawn from the Offering Period
as provided in Section 10 hereof.

                                       -8-

<PAGE>


                  (c) Merger or Asset Sale.  In the event of a proposed  sale of
all or  substantially  all of the  assets of the  Company,  or the merger of the
Company  with or into  another  corporation,  each  outstanding  option shall be
assumed or an equivalent  option  substituted by the successor  corporation or a
Parent  or  Subsidiary  of the  successor  corporation.  In the  event  that the
successor  corporation  refuses  to assume or  substitute  for the  option,  any
Purchase  Periods then in progress  shall be shortened by setting a new Exercise
Date (the "New Exercise  Date") and any Offering  Periods then in progress shall
end on the New Exercise  Date. The New Exercise Date shall be before the date of
the Company's  proposed sale or merger.  The Board shall notify each participant
in writing, at least ten (10) business days prior to the New Exercise Date, that
the  Exercise  Date for the  participant's  option  has been  changed to the New
Exercise Date and that the participant's option shall be exercised automatically
on the New  Exercise  Date,  unless  prior  to such  date  the  participant  has
withdrawn from the Offering Period as provided in Section 10 hereof.

         20. Amendment or Termination.

                  (a) The Board of  Directors of the Company may at any time and
for any reason  terminate  or amend the Plan.  Except as  provided in Section 19
hereof, no such termination can affect options previously granted, provided that
an Offering  Period may be  terminated by the Board of Directors on any Exercise
Date if the Board  determines  that the  termination  of the Plan is in the best
interests of the Company and its shareholders.  Except as provided in Section 19
hereof, no amendment may make any change in any option theretofore granted which
adversely  affects the rights of any  participant.  To the extent  necessary  to
comply with Section 423 of the Code (or any  successor  rule or provision or any
other  applicable  law,  regulation or stock exchange  rule),  the Company shall
obtain shareholder approval in such a manner and to such a degree as required.

                  (b) Without  shareholder consent and without regard to whether
any participant rights may be considered to have been "adversely  affected," the
Board (or its committee) shall be entitled to change the Offering Periods, limit
the frequency and/or number of changes in the amount withheld during an Offering
Period,   establish  a  limit  on  the  number  of  shares  purchasable  by  all
participants  at the end of each Purchase  Period,  establish the exchange ratio
applicable to amounts  withheld in a currency  other than U.S.  dollars,  permit
payroll withholding in excess of the amount designated by a participant in order
to adjust  for  delays or  mistakes  in the  Company's  processing  of  properly
completed  withholding  elections,  establish  reasonable waiting and adjustment
periods  and/or  accounting  and  crediting  procedures  to ensure that  amounts
applied  toward  the  purchase  of Common  Stock for each  participant  properly
correspond  with  amounts  withheld  from the  participant's  Compensation,  and
establish  such other  limitations or procedures as the Board (or its committee)
determines in its sole discretion advisable which are consistent with the Plan.

         21. Notices.  All notices or other  communications  by a participant to
the Company  under or in  connection  with the Plan shall be deemed to have been
duly given when received in the form

                                       -9-

<PAGE>


specified by the Company at the  location,  or by the person,  designated by the
Company for the receipt thereof.

         22. Conditions Upon Issuance of Shares. Shares shall not be issued with
respect to an option  unless the  exercise of such option and the  issuance  and
delivery of such  shares  pursuant  thereto  shall  comply  with all  applicable
provisions  of law,  domestic or foreign,  including,  without  limitation,  the
Securities  Act of 1933,  as amended,  the  Securities  Exchange Act of 1934, as
amended, the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder,  and the requirements
of any stock  exchange  upon which the  shares may then be listed,  and shall be
further  subject to the approval of counsel for the Company with respect to such
compliance.

                  As a condition to the  exercise of an option,  the Company may
require the person  exercising  such option to represent and warrant at the time
of any such exercise that the shares are being purchased only for investment and
without  any  present  intention  to sell or  distribute  such shares if, in the
opinion of counsel for the Company,  such a representation is required by any of
the aforementioned applicable provisions of law.

         23. Term of Plan.  The Plan shall become  effective upon the earlier to
occur  of its  adoption  by the  Board  of  Directors  or  its  approval  by the
shareholders of the Company.  It shall continue in effect for a term of ten (10)
years unless sooner terminated under Section 20 hereof.

         24.  Automatic  Transfer to Low Price  Offering  Period.  To the extent
permitted by any applicable  laws,  regulations,  or stock exchange rules if the
Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on any Exercise Date in an Offering Period
is lower than the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the  Enrollment  Date
of such Offering Period,  then all participants in such Offering Period shall be
automatically withdrawn from such Offering Period immediately after the exercise
of their  option on such  Exercise  Date and  automatically  re-enrolled  in the
immediately following Offering Period as of the first day thereof.

                                      -10-

<PAGE>


                                    EXHIBIT A


                              SPECTRIAN CORPORATION

                        1998 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN

                             SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT



_____ Original Application                          Enrollment Date: ___________
_____ Change in Payroll Deduction Rate
_____ Change of Beneficiary(ies)


1.       ___________________________   hereby  elects  to   participate  in  the
         Spectrian  Corporation 1998 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the "Employee
         Stock  Purchase  Plan")  and  subscribes  to  purchase  shares  of  the
         Company's Common Stock in accordance with this  Subscription  Agreement
         and the Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

2.       I hereby authorize payroll  deductions from each paycheck in the amount
         of ____% of my  Compensation  on each payday (not to exceed 15%) during
         the Offering  Period in  accordance  with the Employee  Stock  Purchase
         Plan. (Please note that no fractional percentages are permitted.)

3.       I understand that said payroll  deductions shall be accumulated for the
         purchase of shares of Common  Stock at the  applicable  Purchase  Price
         determined  in  accordance  with the Employee  Stock  Purchase  Plan. I
         understand  that if I do not  withdraw  from an  Offering  Period,  any
         accumulated  payroll deductions will be used to automatically  exercise
         my option.

4.       I have received a copy of the complete  Employee Stock Purchase Plan. I
         understand that my participation in the Employee Stock Purchase Plan is
         in all respects  subject to the terms of the Plan. I understand that my
         ability to exercise  the option  under this  Subscription  Agreement is
         subject to shareholder approval of the Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

5.       Shares  purchased for me under the Employee  Stock Purchase Plan should
         be issued in the name(s) of  (Employee  or Employee  and Spouse  only):
         ______________________________________.

6.       I understand that if I dispose of any shares received by me pursuant to
         the Plan within 2 years after the Enrollment Date (the first day of the
         Offering Period during which I purchased such shares) or one year after
         the Exercise Date, I will be treated for federal income tax purposes


<PAGE>


         as having received  ordinary income at the time of such  disposition in
         an amount equal to the excess of the fair market value of the shares at
         the time such shares were  purchased  by me over the price which I paid
         for the shares.  I hereby agree to notify the Company in writing within
         30 days after the date of any  disposition of my shares and I will make
         adequate  provision  for  Federal,   state  or  other  tax  withholding
         obligations,  if any,  which arise upon the  disposition  of the Common
         Stock.  The Company may, but will not be obligated to, withhold from my
         compensation  the amount  necessary to meet any applicable  withholding
         obligation including any withholding necessary to make available to the
         Company any tax  deductions or benefits  attributable  to sale or early
         disposition  of Common  Stock by me. If I dispose of such shares at any
         time after the expiration of the 2-year and 1-year holding  periods,  I
         understand  that I will be treated for federal  income tax  purposes as
         having received income only at the time of such  disposition,  and that
         such income  will be taxed as ordinary  income only to the extent of an
         amount  equal to the lesser of (1) the excess of the fair market  value
         of the shares at the time of such  disposition  over the purchase price
         which I paid for the shares, or (2) 15% of the fair market value of the
         shares on the first day of the Offering  Period.  The  remainder of the
         gain, if any,  recognized on such  disposition will be taxed as capital
         gain.

7.       I hereby agree to be bound by the terms of the Employee  Stock Purchase
         Plan. The  effectiveness  of this  Subscription  Agreement is dependent
         upon my eligibility to participate in the Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

8.       In the  event of my  death,  I hereby  designate  the  following  as my
         beneficiary(ies)  to receive all  payments  and shares due me under the
         Employee Stock Purchase Plan:


NAME:  (Please print)___________________________________________________________
                           (First)         (Middle)               (Last)


_______________________________               __________________________________
Relationship

                                              __________________________________
                                                     (Address)

                                       -2-

<PAGE>


Employee's Social
Security Number:                              __________________________________



Employee's Address:                           __________________________________

                                              __________________________________

                                              __________________________________


I UNDERSTAND THAT THIS SUBSCRIPTION  AGREEMENT SHALL REMAIN IN EFFECT THROUGHOUT
SUCCESSIVE OFFERING PERIODS UNLESS TERMINATED BY ME.



Dated:_________________________               __________________________________
                                                     Signature of Employee


                                              __________________________________
                                                     Spouse's Signature 
                                              (If beneficiary other than spouse)

                                       -3-

<PAGE>


                                    EXHIBIT B


                              SPECTRIAN CORPORATION

                        1998 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN

                              NOTICE OF WITHDRAWAL


         The  undersigned  participant  in the Offering  Period of the Spectrian
Corporation  1998  Employee  Stock  Purchase  Plan which began on  ____________,
19____ (the "Enrollment Date") hereby notifies the Company that he or she hereby
withdraws from the Offering Period.  He or she hereby directs the Company to pay
to the  undersigned  as  promptly  as  practicable  all the  payroll  deductions
credited  to his or her  account  with  respect  to such  Offering  Period.  The
undersigned  understands  and agrees  that his or her  option for such  Offering
Period will be automatically  termi nated. The undersigned  understands  further
that no further  payroll  deductions  will be made for the purchase of shares in
the current Offering Period and the undersigned shall be eligible to participate
in  succeeding  Offering  Periods  only  by  delivering  to  the  Company  a new
Subscription Agreement.


                                              Name and Address of Participant:

                                              __________________________________

                                              __________________________________

                                              __________________________________


                                              Signature:

                                              __________________________________


                                              Date:_____________________________




                             BASIC LEASE INFORMATION



LEASE DATE:                         December 19, 1997


TENANT:                             Spectrian Corporation
                                    a Delaware corporation

TENANT'S ADDRESS:                   350 West Java Drive
                                    Sunnyvale, CA  94089


LANDLORD:                           Stanford Ranch I, LLC
                                    a Delaware limited liability company

LANDLORD'S ADDRESS:                 P.O. Box 1200
                                    Rocklin, CA  95677-1200


Project:                            Atherton Tech Center, Lot 10
                                    Rocklin, CA  95765


Building Description:               An approximate 40,000 SF single-story
                                    concrete tilt-up building.



Premises:                           Approximately  20,858 square feet of office,
                                    tech,  and warehouse  space  situated on the
                                    western  side  of  the   building   commonly
                                    referred  to as  Suite  500  located  within
                                    Atherton  Tech Center on Lot 10 and outlined
                                    on the floor plan attached hereto as Exhibit
                                    A.



Permitted Use:                      General office, manufacturing, storage and
                                    shipping



Parking Density:                    Tenant shall have the right to 83 parking
                                    spaces.


Estimated Term
Commencement Date:                  June 1, 1998


Length of Term:                     Five (5) years.


Base Rent:                          Shall be $17,729.30 per month or $0.85 per
                                    SF NNN


Landlord's Expense:                 Net, Net, Net


Security Deposit:                   None



Tenant's Proportionate Share:       52.1%



Broker:                             Cornish & Carey Commercial
                                    1601 Response Road, Suite 160
                                    Sacramento, CA  95815



The foregoing Basic Lease  Information is  incorporated  into and made a part of
this Lease.  Each reference in this Lease to any of the Basic Lease  Information
shall  mean  the  respective   information  above  and  shall  be  construed  to
incorporate  all of the terms  provided  under the  particular  Lease  paragraph
pertaining to such  information.  In the event of any conflict between the Basic
Lease Information and the Lease, the latter shall control.

                                        i

<PAGE>



                                TABLE OF CONTENTS

                  Basic Lease Information......................................i
                  Table of Contents...........................................ii
         1.       Premises ....................................................1
         2.       Possession and Lease Commencement............................1
         3.       Term.........................................................1
         4.       Use..........................................................1
         5.       Rules and Regulations........................................2
         6.       Rent ........................................................2
         7.       Basic Operating Cost.........................................3
         8.       Insurance and Indemnification................................4
         9.       Waiver of Subrogation .......................................6
         10.      Landlord's Repairs and Services..............................6
         11.      Tenant's Repairs.............................................6
         12.      Alterations..................................................6
         13.      Signs........................................................7
         14.      Inspection/Posting Notices...................................7
         15.      Utilities....................................................7
         16.      Subordination................................................7
         17.      Financial Statements.........................................8
         18.      Estoppel Certificate.........................................8
         19.      Security Deposit.............................................8
         20.      Tenant's Remedies............................................8
         21.      Assignment and Subletting....................................8
         22.      Authority of Parties ........................................9
         23.      Condemnation.................................................9
         24.      Casualty Damage............................................. 9
         25.      Holding Over................................................10
         26.      Default ....................................................10
         27.      Liens.......................................................12
         28.      Substitution................................................12
         29.      Transfers by Landlord.......................................12
         30.      Right of Landlord to Perform Tenant's Covenants.............12
         31.      Waiver......................................................12
         32.      Notices.....................................................12
         33.      Attorneys' Fees.............................................13
         34.      Successors and Assigns......................................13
         35.      Force Majeure...............................................13
         36.      Brokerage Commission........................................13
         37.      Miscellaneous...............................................13
         38.      Additional Provisions.......................................14
                  Signatures..................................................14

         First Addendum to Lease

         Exhibits:
         Exhibit A...................................................  Site Plan
         Exhibit B.................................................  Work Letter
         Exhibit C.....................................  Standard Specifications
         Exhibit D.................................................  Sign Policy
         Exhibit E.......................................  Rules and Regulations
         Exhibit F...............................  Permitted Hazardous Materials

                                       ii

<PAGE>
                                      LEASE

         THIS  LEASE  is made as of this  19th  day of  December,  1997,  by and
between  STANFORD RANCH I, LLC  (hereinafter  called  "Landlord")  and SPECTRIAN
CORPORATION (hereinafter called "Tenant").

1.       PREMISES.

         Landlord  leases to Tenant and Tenant  leases from  Landlord,  upon the
terms and conditions  hereinafter  set forth,  those  premises (the  "Premises")
depicted on the floor plan dated November 6, 1997,  attached hereto as Exhibit A
and described in the Basic Lease Information. The Premises may be all or part of
the  building  (the  "Building")  or of the project  (the  "Project")  which may
consist  of more than one  building.  The  Building  and  Project  are  depicted
respectively on Exhibit A.

2.       POSSESSION AND LEASE COMMENCEMENT.

         A. Intentionally Omitted.

         B. Construction  of  Improvements.  The term  commencement  date ("Term
Commencement  Date") shall be the earlier of the date on which: (1) Tenant takes
possession of some or all of the Premises,  or (2) the improvements  constructed
or to be constructed in the Premises shall have been substantially  completed in
accordance  with the plans and  specifications  described on Exhibits A, B and C
attached  hereto,  whether or not substantial  completion of the Building itself
shall have occurred,  and Landlord has delivered to Tenant a copy of a temporary
or permanent  occupancy  permit.  In no event shall the Term  Commencement  Date
occur  sooner than June 1, 1998,  unless  Tenant  agrees to the earlier  date in
writing. If for any reason Landlord cannot deliver possession of the Premises to
Tenant on the Estimated Term Commencement Date, Landlord shall not be subject to
any liability therefor, nor shall Landlord be in default hereunder. In the event
of any dispute as to substantial  completion of work performed or required to be
performed  by  Landlord,  the  certificate  of  Landlord's  architect or general
contractor  shall be  conclusive.  Substantial  completion  shall have  occurred
notwithstanding  Tenant's  submission  of a punchlist to Landlord,  which Tenant
shall submit,  if at all,  within  thirty (30) days after the Term  Commencement
Date. As of the Term Commencement  Date,  Tenant  acknowledges that Tenant shall
have  inspected the Premises and will accept the Premises in their then existing
"as is"  condition,  broom  clean,  as  suitable  for the  purpose for which the
Premises are leased, and Tenant agrees that said Premises and other improvements
are in good and satisfactory  condition as of when possession was taken, subject
only to the punchlist. Tenant further acknowledges that no representations as to
the  condition  or repair of the  Premises  nor  promises  to alter,  remodel or
improve the Premises  have been made by Landlord  unless such are  expressly set
forth in this Lease. Tenant shall, upon demand,  execute and deliver to Landlord
a letter of  acceptance  of delivery of the  Premises.  In no event,  subject to
Paragraph 35, shall the Term Commencement Date be later than December 31, 1998.

3.       TERM.  The Term of this Lease shall  commence on the Term  Commencement
Date and continue in full force and effect for the number of months specified as
the  Length  of Term in the  Basic  Lease  Information  or until  this  Lease is
terminated as otherwise provided herein. If the Term Commencement Date is a date
other than the first day of the calendar month,  the Term shall be the number of
months of the Length of Term in addition to the remainder of the calendar  month
following the Term Commencement Date.

4.       USE.

         A. General. Tenant shall use the Premises for the Permitted Use and for
no other use or  purpose.  Tenant  shall  control  Tenant's  employees,  agents,
customers, visitors, invitees, licensees, contractors,  assignees and subtenants
(collectively,  "Tenant's  Parties")  in such a manner that Tenant and  Tenant's
Parties  cumulatively do not exceed the Parking Density at any time.  Tenant and
Tenant's Parties shall have the nonexclusive  right to use, in common with other
parties  occupying  the Building or Project,  the parking areas and driveways of
the Project,  subject to such rules and regulations as Landlord may from time to
time prescribe.

         B. Limitations.  Tenant shall not permit any odors,  smoke,  dust, gas,
substances,  noise or  vibrations  to emanate  from the  Premises,  nor take any
action which would constitute a nuisance or would disturb,  obstruct or endanger
any other  tenants of the Building or Project in which the Premises are situated
or interfere with their use of their  respective  premises.  Storage outside the
Premises  of  materials,  vehicles  or any  other  items is  prohibited,  unless
Landlord approves thereof in writing, which approval may be withheld by Landlord
in its sole and absolute discretion.  Tenant shall not use or allow the Premises
to be used for any improper,  immoral,  unlawful or objectionable  purpose,  nor
shall  Tenant  cause or  maintain  or permit  any  nuisance  in, on or about the
Premises.  Tenant shall not commit or suffer the  commission of any waste in, on
or about the  Premises.  Tenant  shall not  allow any sale by  auction  upon the
Premises,  or place any loads upon the floors,  walls or ceilings which endanger
the  structure,  or place any  harmful  liquids  in the  drainage  system of the
Building  or  Project.  No waste,  materials  or refuse  shall be dumped upon or
permitted  to remain  outside the  Premises  except in trash  containers  placed
inside  exterior  enclosures  designated for that purpose by Landlord.  Landlord
shall not be responsible to Tenant for the non-compliance by any other tenant or
occupant of the Building or

                                        1
<PAGE>


Project with any of the above-referenced  rules or any other terms or provisions
of such tenant's or occupant's  lease or other contract.  Landlord agrees to use
reasonable  efforts to cause other  tenants  and  occupants  of the  Building to
comply with the above-referenced rules; however, Landlord shall not be obligated
to litigate in connection therewith.

         C. Compliance  with   Regulations.  By entering  the  Premises,  Tenant
accepts  the  Premises in the  condition  existing as of the date of such entry,
subject to all existing or future  applicable  municipal,  state and federal and
other governmental statutes, regulations, laws and ordinances,  including zoning
ordinances  and  regulations  governing  and relating to the use,  occupancy and
possession  of the Premises  and the use,  storage,  generation  and disposal of
Hazardous  Materials  (hereinafter  defined)  in,  on  and  under  the  Premises
(collectively "Regulations").  Except for pre-existing violations, Tenant shall,
at Tenant's sole expense,  strictly  comply with all Regulations now in force or
which may  hereafter  be in force  relating to the  Premises  and the use of the
Premises and/or the use, storage,  generation of Hazardous  Materials in, on and
under the Premises.  Tenant shall,  at its sole cost and expense  obtain any and
all licenses or permits necessary for Tenant's use of the Premises. Tenant shall
promptly comply with the requirements of any board of fire underwriters or other
similar  body  now or  hereafter  constituted.  Tenant  shall  not do or  permit
anything  to be done in,  on, or about the  Premises  or bring or keep  anything
which will in any way  increase  the rate of any  insurance  upon the  Premises,
Building or Project,  or upon any contents  therein or cause a  cancellation  of
said insurance or otherwise  affect said  insurance in any manner.  Tenant shall
indemnify, defend, protect and hold Landlord harmless from and against any loss,
cost, expense,  damage,  attorneys' fees or liability arising out of the failure
of Tenant to comply with any applicable law or comply with the  requirements  as
set forth herein.

         D. Hazardous  Wastes.  Tenant shall not cause, or allow any of Tenant's
Parties to cause,  any  Hazardous  Materials  to be used,  generated,  stored or
disposed of on or about the  Premises,  the Building or the Project,  except for
those Hazardous Materials listed on Exhibit "F" attached hereto,  which shall be
permitted so long as Tenant uses, stores and handles the same in compliance with
all laws. As used in this Lease, "Hazardous Materials" shall include, but not be
limited to,  hazardous,  toxic and  radioactive  materials and those  substances
defined as "hazardous  substances,"  "hazardous  materials," "hazardous wastes,"
"toxic  substances,"  or other similar  designations  in any federal,  state, or
local  law,  regulation,  or  ordinance.  Landlord  shall  have the right at all
reasonable times to inspect the Premises and to conduct tests and investigations
to determine whether Tenant is in compliance with the foregoing provisions,  and
if  same  indicate  Tenant  has  violated  any  laws,  breached  this  Lease  or
contaminated  the  Premises,  Building or Project in any way, in addition to any
and all rights and  remedies  of  Landlord,  the costs of all such  inspections,
tests and investigations to be borne by Tenant. Tenant shall indemnify,  defend,
protect and hold  Landlord  harmless from and against all  liabilities,  losses,
costs and expenses,  demands,  causes of action, claims or judgments directly or
indirectly arising out of the use, generation,  storage or disposal of Hazardous
Materials by Tenant or any of Tenant's  Parties,  which indemnity shall include,
without  limitation,  the cost of any required or necessary  repair,  cleanup or
detoxification,  and the  preparation  of any closure or other  required  plans,
whether  such  action  is  required  or  necessary  prior  to or  following  the
termination of this Lease.  Neither the written  consent by Landlord to the use,
generation, storage or disposal of Hazardous Materials nor the strict compliance
by Tenant with all laws  pertaining to Hazardous  Materials  shall excuse Tenant
from Tenant's  obligation of  indemnification  pursuant to this  Paragraph  4.D.
Tenant's  obligations  pursuant to the  foregoing  indemnity  shall  survive the
termination of this Lease.

5. RULES AND REGULATIONS.  Tenant shall  faithfully  observe and comply with any
rules and  regulations  Landlord may from time to time  prescribe in writing for
the purpose of maintaining the proper care,  cleanliness,  safety,  traffic flow
and  general  order of the  Premises  or Project.  Tenant  shall cause  Tenant's
Parties  to  comply  with  such  rules and  regulations.  Landlord  shall not be
responsible to Tenant for the  non-compliance by any other tenant or occupant of
the Building or Project with any of the rules and  regulations.  Landlord agrees
to use  reasonable  efforts to cause other tenants and occupants of the Building
to  comply  with the  above-referenced  rules;  however,  Landlord  shall not be
obligated to litigate in connection therewith.

6.       RENT.

         A. Base Rent.  Tenant shall pay to Landlord,  without demand throughout
the Term,  Base Rent as  specified  in the Basic Lease  Information,  payable in
monthly  installments  in advance  on or before  the first day of each  calendar
month,  in  lawful  money of the  United  States,  without  deduction  or offset
whatsoever,  at the address  specified in the Basic Lease Information or to such
other  place as Landlord  may from time to time  designate  in  writing.  If the
obligation  for payment of Base Rent  commences on other than the first day of a
month,  then Base Rent shall be prorated and the prorated  installment  shall be
paid  on  the  first  day  of  the  calendar  month  next  succeeding  the  Term
Commencement Date.

         B. Additional Rent. All monies other than Base Rent required to be paid
by Tenant hereunder, including, but not limited to, the interest and late charge
described in Paragraph 26.D., any monies spent by Landlord pursuant to Paragraph
30, and Tenant's  Proportionate  Share of Basic  Operating Cost, as specified in
Paragraph 7 of this Lease,  shall be  considered  additional  rent  ("Additional
Rent"). "Rent" shall mean Base Rent and Additional Rent.

                                        2
<PAGE>

7.       BASIC OPERATING COST.

         A. Basic  Operating  Cost.  In addition to the Base Rent required to be
paid  hereunder,  Tenant shall pay as Additional  Rent,  Tenant's  Proportionate
Share, as defined in the Basic Lease Information, of Basic Operating Cost in the
manner set forth below.  Landlord shall account for each item of Basic Operating
Cost as  either  a cost  attributable  to the  Building  or to the  Project,  as
determined by Landlord in Landlord's sole discretion, and unless provided to the
contrary in this Lease, Tenant shall pay the applicable  Tenant's  Proportionate
Share of each  such  Basic  Operating  Cost,  as set  forth in the  Basic  Lease
Information.  Basic  Operating  Cost shall mean all  expenses and costs of every
kind and nature which Landlord shall pay or become  obligated to pay, because of
or in connection with the management, maintenance, preservation and operation of
the  Project  and its  supporting  facilities  (determined  in  accordance  with
generally accepted accounting  principles,  consistently  applied) including but
not limited to the following:

                  (1) Taxes. All real property taxes, possessory interest taxes,
business  or license  taxes or fees,  service  payments in lieu of such taxes or
fees, annual or periodic license or use fees, excises,  transit charges, housing
fund  assessments,  open space charges,  assessments,  levies,  fees or charges,
general and special, ordinary and extraordinary, unforeseen as well as foreseen,
of any kind (including  fees "in-lieu" of any such tax or assessment)  which are
assessed,  levied,  charged,  confirmed, or imposed by any public authority upon
the Project,  its  operations or the Rent (or any portion or component  thereof)
(all of the  foregoing  being  hereinafter  collectively  referred  to as  "real
property taxes"),  or any tax imposed in substitution,  partially or totally, of
any tax previously included within the definition of real property taxes, or any
additional tax the nature of which was previously included within the definition
of real property  taxes,  except (a) inheritance or estate taxes imposed upon or
assessed against the Project,  or any part thereof or interest therein,  and (b)
taxes  computed  upon the basis of net  income of  Landlord  or the owner of any
interest therein, except as otherwise provided in the following sentence.  Basic
Operating  Cost shall also  include  any taxes,  assessments,  or any other fees
imposed by any public  authority upon or measured by the monthly rental or other
charges payable hereunder,  including,  without limitation, any gross income tax
or excise tax levied by the local governmental authority in which the Project is
located, the federal government,  or any other governmental body with respect to
receipt  of  such  rental,  or  upon,  with  respect  to or  by  reason  of  the
development,    possession,   leasing,   operation,   management,   maintenance,
alteration,  repair,  use or  occupancy by Tenant of the Premises or any portion
thereof,  or upon this  transaction  or any  document to which Tenant is a party
creating or transferring an interest or an estate in the Premises.  In the event
that it shall not be lawful for Tenant to reimburse Landlord for all or any part
of such taxes,  the monthly rental payable to Landlord under this Lease shall be
revised to net to  Landlord  the same net rental  after  imposition  of any such
taxes by Landlord as would have been payable to Landlord prior to the payment of
any such taxes.

                  (2) Insurance. All insurance premiums and costs, including but
not limited to, any deductible amounts,  premiums and cost of insurance incurred
by Landlord, as more fully set forth in Paragraph 8.A. herein.

                  (3)  Repairs  and  Improvements.   Repairs,  replacements  and
general  maintenance  for the Premises,  Building and Project  (except for those
repairs expressly made the financial  responsibility of Landlord pursuant to the
terms of this Lease,  repairs to the extent paid for by proceeds of insurance or
by Tenant or other third parties, and alterations attributable solely to tenants
of the Project  other than  Tenant).  Such  repairs,  replacements,  and general
maintenance  shall  include  the  cost of any  capital  improvements  made to or
capital assets  acquired for the Project,  Building,  or Premises after the Term
Commencement  Date that reduce any other Basic  Operating  Cost,  are reasonably
necessary for the health and safety of the occupants of the Project, or are made
to the Building by Landlord  after the date of this Lease and are required under
any governmental law or regulation,  such costs or allocable portions thereof to
be amortized over such reasonable  period as Landlord shall determine,  together
with interest on the unamortized balance at the "prime rate" charged at the time
such  improvements  or capital assets are constructed or acquired by Wells Fargo
Bank, N.A. (San Francisco), plus two (2) percentage points, but in no event more
than the maximum rate permitted by law.

                  (4) Services. All expenses relating to maintenance, janitorial
and service agreements and services, and costs of supplies and equipment used in
maintaining the Premises, Building and Project and the equipment therein and the
adjacent sidewalks,  driveways,  parking and service areas,  including,  without
limitation,  alarm service,  window  cleaning,  elevator  maintenance,  Building
exterior maintenance and landscaping.

                  (5) Utilities. Utilities which benefit all or a portion of the
Premises, Building or Project.

                  (6) Management  Fee. A management and accounting cost recovery
fee equal to three  percent  (3%) of the sum of Base  Rent and  Basic  Operating
Cost.

                  (7)  Legal  and  Accounting.  Legal  and  accounting  expenses
relating  to the  Project,  including  the cost of  audits by  certified  public
accountants.

In the event that the Building is not fully  occupied  during any fiscal year of
the Term as determined by Landlord, an adjustment shall be made in computing the
Basic  Operating  Cost for such year so that Tenant pays Tenant's  Proportionate
Share of Basic Operating Cost, with variable costs increased on an

                                        3
<PAGE>
extrapolated basis to what they would be if the Building was fully occupied,  as
reasonably  determined by Landlord;  provided,  however,  that in no event shall
Landlord be entitled to collect in excess of one hundred  percent  (100%) of the
total Basic  Operating  Cost from all of the tenants in the  Building  including
Tenant.

Basic  Operating Cost shall not include  specific costs incurred for the account
of, separately billed to and paid by specific tenants.

         B. Payment  of   Estimated  Basic  Operating  Cost.   "Estimated  Basic
Operating Cost" for any particular  year shall mean  Landlord's  estimate of the
Basic  Operating  Cost for such fiscal year made prior to  commencement  of such
fiscal year as hereinafter provided.  Landlord shall have the right from time to
time to revise its fiscal  year and  interim  accounting  periods so long as the
periods as so revised  are  reconciled  with prior  periods in  accordance  with
generally accepted accounting  principles applied in a consistent manner. During
the last month of each  fiscal year during the Term,  or as soon  thereafter  as
practicable,  Landlord shall give Tenant  written notice of the Estimated  Basic
Operating  Cost  for  the  ensuing  fiscal  year.   Tenant  shall  pay  Tenant's
Proportionate  Share of the Estimated Basic Operating Cost with  installments of
Base  Rent for the  fiscal  year to which the  Estimated  Basic  Operating  Cost
applies in monthly  installments  on the first day of each calendar month during
such year,  in  advance.  If at any time  during the course of the fiscal  year,
Landlord determines that Basic Operating Cost is projected to vary from the then
Estimated Basic Operating Cost by more than ten percent (10%),  Landlord may, by
written  notice to Tenant,  revise the Estimated  Basic  Operating  Cost for the
balance of such fiscal year, and Tenant's monthly installments for the remainder
of such year shall be adjusted so that by the end of such fiscal year Tenant has
paid to Landlord  Tenant's  Proportionate  Share of the revised  Estimated Basic
Operating Cost for such year.

         C. Computation  of Basic Operating Cost  Adjustment.  "Basic  Operating
Cost  Adjustment"  shall mean the difference  between  Estimated Basic Operating
Cost and Basic  Operating  Cost for any fiscal year  determined  as  hereinafter
provided.  Within one  hundred  twenty  (120) days after the end of each  fiscal
year,  Landlord shall deliver to Tenant a statement of Basic  Operating Cost for
the fiscal year just ended, accompanied by a computation of Basic Operating Cost
Adjustment.  It such statement shows that Tenant's  payment based upon Estimated
Basic  Operating  Cost  is less  than  Tenant's  Proportionate  Share  of  Basic
Operating Cost,  then Tenant shall pay to Landlord the difference  within thirty
(30) days after receipt of such statement. If such statement shows that Tenant's
payments of Estimated Basic Operating Cost exceed Tenant's  Proportionate  Share
of Basic Operating Cost, then (provided that Tenant is not in default under this
Lease) Landlord shall pay to Tenant the difference within thirty (30) days after
delivery of such statement to Tenant.  If this Lease has been  terminated or the
Term  hereof has  expired  prior to the date of such  statement,  then the Basic
Operating Cost Adjustment  shall be paid by the appropriate  party within thirty
(30)  days  after the date of  delivery  of the  statement.  Should  this  Lease
commence or  terminate  at any time other than the first day of the fiscal year,
Tenant's  Proportionate  Share of the Basic Operating Cost  adjustment  shall be
prorated by reference  to the exact  number of calendar  days during such fiscal
year that this Lease is in effect.

         D. Net Lease.  This shall be a net Lease and Base Rent shall be paid to
Landlord  absolutely  net of all costs  and  expenses,  except  as  specifically
provided  to the  contrary in this Lease,  The  provisions  for payment of Basic
Operating Cost and the Basic  Operating Cost  Adjustment are intended to pass on
to Tenant  and  reimburse  Landlord  for all costs and  expenses  of the  nature
described  in  Paragraph  7.A.   incurred  in  connection  with  the  ownership,
maintenance  and  operation  of the  Building  or  Project  and such  additional
facilities  now and in  subsequent  years as may be determined by Landlord to be
necessary to the Building or Project.

         E. Tenant Audit.  In the event that Tenant shall dispute the amount set
forth in any statement  provided by Landlord under Paragraph 7.B. or 7.C. above,
Tenant  shall have the right,  not later than  thirty  (30) days  following  the
receipt of such statement and upon the condition that Tenant shall first deposit
with Landlord the full amount in dispute,  to cause Landlord's books and records
with  respect  to Basic  Operating  Cost for such  fiscal  year to be audited by
certified  public  accountants  selected  by Tenant and  subject  to  Landlord's
reasonable  right of approval.  The Basic  Operating  Cost  Adjustment  shall be
appropriately  adjusted  on the basis of such audit.  If such audit  discloses a
liability for a refund in excess of ten percent (10%) of Tenant's  Proportionate
Share of the Basic Operating Cost Adjustment  previously  reported,  the cost of
such audit shall be borne by Landlord; otherwise the cost of such audit shall be
paid by Tenant.  If Tenant  shall not  request an audit in  accordance  with the
provisions  of this  Paragraph,  i.e.,  within thirty (30) days after receipt of
Landlord's statement provided pursuant to Paragraph 7.B. or 7.C., such statement
shall be final and binding for all purposes hereof.

8.       INSURANCE AND INDEMNIFICATION.

         A. Landlord's Insurance. Landlord agrees to maintain insurance insuring
the  Building  against  fire,   lightning,   vandalism  and  malicious  mischief
(including,  if Landlord elects, "All Risk" coverage,  earthquake,  and/or flood
insurance),  in an amount not less than eighty percent (80%) of the  replacement
cost thereof, with deductibles and the form and endorsements of such coverage as
selected by Landlord.  Such  insurance may also include,  at Landlord's  option,
insurance  against loss of Base Rent and Additional  Rent, in an amount equal to
the amount of Base Rent and Additional Rent payable by Tenant for a period of at
least twelve (12) months commencing on the date of loss. Such insurance shall be
for the sole benefit of Landlord and under  Landlord's  sole  control.  Landlord
shall not be obligated to insure any furniture,  equipment,  machinery, goods or
supplies which Tenant may keep or maintain in the

                                        4
<PAGE>

Premises,  or any leasehold  improvements,  additions or alterations  within the
Premises.  Landlord  may also carry such other  insurance  as Landlord  may deem
prudent or advisable, including, without limitation, liability insurance in such
amounts and on such terms as Landlord shall determine.

         B.       Tenant's insurance.

                  (1) Property Insurance.  Tenant shall procure at Tenant's sole
cost and expense and keep in effect from the date of this Lease and at all times
until the end of the Term,  insurance on all  personal  property and fixtures of
Tenant and all improvements made by or for Tenant to the Premises, insuring such
property for the full replacement value of such property.

                  (2) Liability Insurance. Tenant shall procure at Tenant's sole
cost and expense and keep in effect from the date of this Lease and at all times
until the end of the Term either  Comprehensive  General Liability  insurance or
Commercial General Liability  insurance applying to the use and occupancy of the
Premises  and the  Building,  and any part of  either,  and any  areas  adjacent
thereto,  and the business  operated by Tenant,  or by any other occupant on the
Premises.   Such  insurance  shall  include  Broad  Form  Contractual  Liability
Insurance  coverage  insuring all of Tenant's  indemnity  obligations under this
Lease.  Such coverage shall have a minimum combined single limit of liability of
at least Two Million Dollars  ($2,000,000.00),  and a general aggregate limit of
Three Million  Dollars  ($3,000,000.00).  All such policies  shall be written to
apply to all bodily injury,  property damage or loss,  personal injury and other
covered loss,  however  occasioned,  occurring  during the policy term, shall be
endorsed to add Landlord  and any party  holding an interest to which this Lease
may be  subordinated  as an  additional  insured,  and shall  provide  that such
coverage shall be primary and that any insurance maintained by Landlord shall be
excess  insurance  only.  Such  coverage  shall also contain  endorsements:  (i)
deleting any employee  exclusion on personal  injury  coverage;  (ii)  including
employees as additional insureds; (iii) deleting any liquor liability exclusion;
and  (iv)  providing  for  coverage  of  employer's  automobile  non-  ownership
liability. All such insurance shall provide for severability of interests; shall
provide that an act or omission of one of the named insureds shall not reduce or
avoid coverage to the other named  insureds;  and shall afford  coverage for all
claims based on acts,  omissions,  injury and damage,  which claims  occurred or
arose (or the onset of which  occurred  or arose) in whole or in part during the
policy  period.  Said coverage  shall be written on an  "occurrence"  basis,  if
available. If an "occurrence" basis form is not available.  Tenant must purchase
"tail"  coverage  for the most number of years  available,  and Tenant must also
purchase "tail" coverage if the retroactive  date of an "occurrence"  basis form
is  changed so as to leave a gap in  coverage  for  occurrences  that might have
occurred in prior years. If a "claims made" policy is ever used, the policy must
be endorsed so that  Landlord  is given the right to  purchase  "tail"  coverage
should  Tenant for any reason not do so or if the policy is to be  canceled  for
nonpayment of premium.

                  (3) General Insurance Requirements. All coverages described in
this Paragraph 8.B. shall be endorsed to provide Landlord with thirty (30) days'
notice of  cancellation  or change in terms.  If at any time during the Term the
amount or coverage  of  insurance  which  Tenant is required to carry under this
Paragraph 8.B. is, in Landlord's  reasonable judgment,  materially less than the
amount or type of insurance  coverage  typically carried by owners or tenants of
properties  located in the general area in which the Premises are located  which
are similar to and operated for similar purposes as the Premises, Landlord shall
have the right to require  Tenant to increase  the amount or change the types of
insurance  coverage  required under this  Paragraph 8.B. All insurance  policies
required to be carried under this Lease shall be written by companies  rated A +
XII or better in "Best's  Insurance  Guide" and  authorized  to do  business  in
California.  Any  deductible  amounts  under  any  insurance  policies  required
hereunder shall be subject to Landlord's  prior written  approval.  In any event
deductible amounts shall not exceed Ten Thousand Dollars ($10,000.00), provided,
however,  that the original Tenant may have a deductible of up to Fifty Thousand
Dollars  ($50,000.00).  Tenant  shall  deliver to Landlord on or before the Term
Commencement  Date,  and  thereafter  at  least  thirty  (30)  days  before  the
expiration  dates  of  the  expiring  policies,  certified  copies  of  Tenant's
insurance policies,  or a certificate  evidencing the same issued by the insurer
thereunder, showing that all premiums have been paid for the full policy period;
and, in the event  Tenant shall fail to procure  such  insurance,  or to deliver
such  policies  or  certificates,  Landlord  may,  at  Landlord's  option and in
addition  to  Landlord's  other  remedies  in the event of a  default  by Tenant
hereunder,  procure  the same for the  account of Tenant,  and the cost  thereof
shall be paid to Landlord as Additional Rent.

         C. Indemnification. Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant for any loss
or damage to person or property  caused by theft,  fire,  acts of God, acts of a
public enemy, riot, strike, insurrection, war, court order, requisition or order
of governmental  body or authority or for any damage or inconvenience  which may
arise  through  repair or  alteration  of any part of the Building or Project or
failure to make any such  repair,  except as  expressly  otherwise  provided  in
Paragraph 10. Tenant shall indemnify,  defend by counsel acceptable to Landlord,
protect and hold  Landlord  harmless  from and against any and all  liabilities,
losses,  costs, damages,  injuries or expenses,  including reasonable attorneys'
fees and court  costs,  arising out of or related to: (1) claims of injury to or
death of  persons or damage to  property  occurring  or  resulting  directly  or
indirectly  from the use or occupancy of the  Premises,  or from  activities  of
Tenant,  Tenant's Parties or anyone in or about the Premises or Project, or from
any cause whatsoever;  (2) claims for work or labor performed,  or for materials
or  supplies  furnished  to or at the  request  of  Tenant  in  connection  with
performance  of any work done for the account of Tenant  within the  Premises or
Project; and (3) claims arising from any breach or default on the part of Tenant
in the  performance  of any  covenant  contained  in this Lease.  The  foregoing
indemnity  shall not be applicable to claims arising from the active  negligence
or willful misconduct of Landlord. The provisions of this

                                        5

<PAGE>

Paragraph shall survive the expiration or termination of this Lease with respect
to any claims or liability occurring prior to such expiration or termination.

9.       WAIVER OF  SUBROGATION.  To the  extent  permitted  by law and  without
affecting  the  coverage  provided  by  insurance  to be  maintained  hereunder,
Landlord  and Tenant each waive any right to recover  against the other for: (a)
damages for injury to or death of persons; (b) damages to property;  (c) damages
to the  Premises or any part  thereof;  and (d) claims  arising by reason of the
foregoing  due to  hazards  covered  by  insurance  to the  extent  of  proceeds
recovered  therefrom.  This  provision is intended to waive  fully,  and for the
benefit of each party, any rights and/or claims which might give rise to a right
of subrogation in favor of any insurance carrier.  The coverage obtained by each
party  pursuant to this Lease shall  include,  without  limitation,  a waiver of
subrogation by the carrier which conforms to the provisions of this paragraph.

10.      LANDLORD'S REPAIRS AND SERVICES. Landlord shall, at Landlord's expense,
maintain  the  structural  soundness  of  the  structural  beams  of  the  roof,
foundations  and exterior walls of the Building in good repair,  reasonable wear
and tear excepted.  The term  "exterior  walls" as used herein shall not include
windows,  glass or plate glass,  doors,  special store fronts or office entries.
Landlord shall perform on behalf of Tenant and other tenants of the Project,  as
an item of Basic Operating Cost, the maintenance of the Building,  Project,  and
public and common areas of the Project,  including  but not limited to the roof,
pest extermination,  the landscaped areas, parking areas,  driveways,  the truck
staging areas, rail spur areas, fire sprinkler systems, sanitary and storm sewer
lines,  utility  services,   electric  and  telephone  equipment  servicing  the
Building(s),  exterior  lighting,  and anything  which affects the operation and
exterior  appearance of the Project,  which determination shall be at Landlord's
sole  discretion.   Except  for  the  expenses  directly   involving  the  items
specifically  described in the first sentence of this Paragraph 10, Tenant shall
reimburse Landlord for all such costs in accordance with Paragraph 7. Any damage
caused by or  repairs  necessitated  by any act of  Tenant  may be  repaired  by
Landlord at Landlord's option and at Tenant's expense.  Tenant shall immediately
give  Landlord  written  notice of any  defect or need of  repairs  after  which
Landlord  shall  have  a  reasonable  opportunity  to  repair  same.  Landlord's
liability  with  respect  to any  defects,  repairs,  or  maintenance  for which
Landlord  is  responsible  under any of the  provisions  of this Lease  shall be
limited to the cost of such repairs or maintenance.

11.      TENANT'S  REPAIRS.  Tenant shall at Tenant's expense maintain all parts
of the Premises in a good,  clean and secure  condition  and  promptly  make all
necessary  repairs and  replacements,  including but not limited to all windows,
glass, doors, walls and wall finishes, floor covering, heating,  ventilating and
air conditioning  systems,  truck doors, dock bumpers, dock plates and levelers,
plumbing work and fixtures,  downspouts,  electrical and lighting  systems,  and
fire sprinklers. Tenant shall, at Tenant's expense, also perform regular removal
of trash and debris. If required by the railroad company,  Tenant agrees to sign
a joint maintenance agreement governing the use of the rail spur, if any. Tenant
shall,  at Tenant's own  expense,  enter into a regularly  scheduled  preventive
maintenance/service contract with a maintenance contractor for servicing all hot
water,  heating and air conditioning systems and equipment within or serving the
Premises.  The  maintenance  contractor  and the  contract  must be  approved by
Landlord.  The service  contract  must  include all  services  suggested  by the
equipment manufacturer within the  operation/maintenance  manual and must become
effective and a copy thereof delivered to Landlord within thirty (30) days after
the Term Commencement Date. Tenant shall not damage any demising wall or disturb
the integrity and support  provided by any demising wail and shall,  at its sole
expense,  immediately repair any damage to any demising wall caused by Tenant or
Tenant's Parties.

12.      ALTERATIONS.   Tenant  shall  not  make,  or  allow  to  be  made,  any
alterations or physical additions in, about or to the Premises without obtaining
the prior written  consent of Landlord,  which consent shall not be unreasonably
withheld with respect to proposed  alterations and additions  which:  (a) comply
with  all  applicable  laws,  ordinances,  rules  and  regulations;  (b)  are in
Landlord's  opinion  compatible with the Project and its  mechanical,  plumbing,
electrical,  heating/ventilation/air  conditioning  systems;  and (c)  will  not
interfere  with the use and  occupancy  of any other  portion of the Building or
Project by any other  tenant or its  invitees.  Notwithstanding  the  foregoing,
Tenant  shall  have the right to make  interior,  nonstructural  alterations  or
additions  to the  Premises  that do not exceed in the  aggregate  Ten  Thousand
Dollars ($10,000.00) per occurrence without Landlord's prior written consent, so
long  as  same do not  affect  utilities,  HVAC or  other  building  systems  or
equipment.  Tenant shall, however,  provide Landlord with advance written notice
of such  interior,  nonstructural  alterations  or additions as required in this
Lease. If Landlord's consent is required for any alterations or additions, then,
without limiting the generality of the foregoing,  Landlord shall have the right
of written consent for all plans and specifications for the proposed alterations
or  additions,  construction  means and  methods,  all  appropriate  permits and
licenses,  any  contractor  or  subcontractor  to be  employed  on the  work  of
alteration or additions, and the time for performance of such work. Tenant shall
also supply to Landlord any documents and  information  reasonably  requested by
Landlord in connection with Landlord's  consideration  of a request for approval
hereunder.  Tenant shall  reimburse  Landlord  for all costs which  Landlord may
incur in connection  with granting  approval to Tenant for any such  alterations
and  additions,  including  any costs or expenses  which  Landlord  may incur in
electing  to have  outside  architects  and  engineers  review  said  plans  and
specifications.  All such alterations,  physical additions or improvements shall
remain the property of Tenant  until  termination  of this Lease,  at which time
they  shall be and  become the  property  of  Landlord  if  Landlord  so elects;
provided, however, that Landlord may, at Landlord's option, require that Tenant,
at Tenant's expense, remove any or all alterations,  additions, improvements and
partitions  made by Tenant and restore the Premises by the  termination  of this
Lease, whether by lapse of time, or otherwise, to their condition existing prior
to the construction of any such alterations,  additions, partitions or leasehold
improvements. All such removals and restoration shall be

                                        6

<PAGE>

accomplished in a good and  workmanlike  manner so as not to cause any damage to
the  Premises  or  Project  whatsoever.  If  Tenant  fails  to  so  remove  such
alterations,  additions,  improvements  and  partitions or Tenant's  fixtures or
furniture,  Landlord  may keep and use them or remove any of them and cause them
to be stored  or sold in  accordance  with  applicable  law,  at  Tenant's  sole
expense.  In  addition  to and wholly  apart  from  Tenant's  obligation  to pay
Tenant's   Proportionate   Share  of  Basic  Operating  Cost,  Tenant  shall  be
responsible  for and shall pay prior to  delinquency  any taxes or  governmental
service fees,  possessory  interest  taxes,  fees or charges in lieu of any such
taxes,  capital levies, or other charges imposed upon, levied with respect to or
assessed  against  its  personal  property,  on the  value  of the  alterations,
additions or improvements within the Premises, and on Tenant's interest pursuant
to this Lease. To the extent that any such taxes are not separately  assessed or
billed to Tenant,  Tenant shall pay the amount  thereof as invoiced to Tenant by
Landlord.

13.      SIGNS.  All signs,  notices and  graphics  of every kind or  character,
visible in or from public view or corridors, the common areas or the exterior of
the Premises,  shall be subject to Landlord's  prior  written  approval.  Tenant
shall not place or maintain any banners  whatsoever or any window decor in or on
any exterior  window or window fronting upon any common areas or service area or
upon any truck doors or man doors without Landlord's prior written approval. Any
installation  of signs or graphics on or about the Premises and Project shall be
subject to any applicable governmental laws, ordinances,  regulations and to any
other requirements  imposed by Landlord.  Tenant shall remove all such signs and
graphics prior to the termination of this Lease. Such installations and removals
shall be made in such manner as to avoid injury or  defacement  of the Premises,
Building or Project and any other  improvements  contained  therein,  and Tenant
shall  repair  any  injury  or  defacement,   including,   without   limitation,
discoloration caused by such installation or removal.

14.      INSPECTION  /  POSTING  NOTICES.  After  reasonable  notice,  except in
emergencies  where no such notice shall be required,  Landlord,  and  Landlord's
agents  and  representatives,  shall  have the  right to enter the  Premises  to
inspect the same, to clean, to perform such work as may be permitted or required
hereunder, to make repairs or alterations to the Premises or Project or to other
tenant spaces therein, to deal with emergencies,  to post such notices as may be
permitted  or  required  by law to  prevent  the  perfection  of  liens  against
Landlord's  interest in the Project or to exhibit  the  Premises to  prospective
tenants,  purchasers,  encumbrancers  or  others,  or for any other  purpose  as
Landlord may deem necessary or desirable; provided, however, that Landlord shall
use reasonable  efforts not to  unreasonably  interfere  with Tenant's  business
operations.  Tenant shall not be entitled to any  abatement of Rent by reason of
the exercise of any such right of entry. At any time within six (6) months prior
to the end of the Term,  Landlord  shall have the right to erect on the Premises
and/or  Project a suitable sign  indicating  that the Premises are available for
lease.  Tenant shall give  written  notice to Landlord at least thirty (30) days
prior to  vacating  the  Premises  and  shall  meet  with  Landlord  for a joint
inspection  of the Premises at the time of vacating for purposes of  determining
Landlord's  and  Tenant's  responsibility  for  repairs and  restorations.  Upon
completion  and/or payment,  as applicable,  of repair and restoration  items by
Tenant which are approved of by Landlord in writing, Tenant shall be relieved of
all further repair and restoration obligations, except those subsequently caused
by Tenant or Tenant's agents, employees, contractors,  subtenants or assigns. In
the event of Tenant's  failure to give such notice or  participate in such joint
inspection,  Landlord's  inspection at or after  Tenant's  vacating the Premises
shall  conclusively  be deemed  correct  for  purposes of  determining  Tenant's
responsibility for repairs and restoration.

15.      UTILITIES.  Tenant  shall pay directly for all water,  gas,  heat,  air
conditioning,  light,  power,  telephone,  sewers,  sprinkler  charges and other
utilities and services  used on or from the  Premises,  together with any taxes,
penalties,  surcharges or the like pertaining  thereto,  and maintenance charges
for utilities and shall  furnish all electric  light bulbs,  ballasts and tubes.
Landlord  shall at  Landlord's  sole cost and expense  separately  meter gas and
electricity for the Premises. If any such services are not separately metered to
Tenant, Tenant shall pay a reasonable proportion,  as determined by Landlord, of
all charges jointly serving other premises. Landlord shall not be liable for any
damages  directly or indirectly  resulting from nor shall the Rent or any monies
owed Landlord  under this Lease herein  reserved be abated by reason of: (a) the
installation,  use or  interruption  of use of any equipment  used in connection
with the  furnishing  of any such  utilities  or  services;  (b) the  failure to
furnish or delay in furnishing  any such utilities or services when such failure
or delay is caused by acts of God or the  elements,  labor  disturbances  of any
character,  or any other  accidents or other  conditions  beyond the  reasonable
control  of  Landlord;  or  (c)  the  limitation,   curtailment,   rationing  or
restriction on use of water, electricity, gas or any other form of energy or any
other service or utility  whatsoever  serving the Premises or Project.  Landlord
shall be entitled to cooperate  voluntarily and in a reasonable  manner with the
efforts of national,  state or local governmental  agencies or utility suppliers
in  reducing  energy  or other  resource  consumption.  The  obligation  to make
services  available  hereunder  shall be subject to the  limitations of any such
voluntary, reasonable program.

16.      SUBORDINATION. Without the necessity of  any additional  document being
executed by Tenant for the purpose of effecting a subordination, the Lease shall
be subject and  subordinate at all times to: (a) all ground leases or underlying
leases  which may now exist or  hereafter  be executed  affecting  the  Premises
and/or the land upon which the Premises and Project are situated,  or both;  and
(b) any  mortgage  or deed of trust  which may now exist or be placed  upon said
Project,  land, ground leases or underlying  leases,  or Landlord's  interest or
estate in any of said items which is specified as security.  Notwithstanding the
foregoing,  Landlord  shall  have  the  right  to  subordinate  or  cause  to be
subordinated  any such ground leases or  underlying  leases or any such liens to
this Lease.  In the event that any ground lease or underlying  lease  terminates
for any reason or any mortgage or deed of trust is foreclosed or a conveyance in
lieu of foreclosure is made for any reason, Tenant shall, notwithstanding

                                        7

<PAGE>

any subordination,  attorn to and become the Tenant of the successor in interest
to Landlord at the option of such  successor in  interest.  Within ten (10) days
after  request by  Landlord,  Tenant  shall  execute and deliver any  additional
documents evidencing Tenant's attornment or the subordination of this Lease with
respect to any such ground leases or  underlying  leases or any such mortgage or
deed of trust,  in the form  requested  by Landlord  or by any ground  landlord,
mortgagee, or beneficiary under a deed of trust.

17.      FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.  At the request of Landlord, Tenant shall provide
to Landlord Tenant's current financial statement or other information discussing
financial worth of Tenant,  which Landlord shall use solely for purposes of this
Lease and in connection  with the ownership,  management and  disposition of the
Project.

18.      ESTOPPEL  CERTIFICATE.  Tenant agrees from time to time, within fifteen
(15) days after  request of  Landlord,  to deliver to  Landlord,  or  Landlord's
designee,  an estoppel  certificate stating that this Lease is in full force and
effect,  the date to which Rent has been  paid,  the  unexpired  portion of this
Lease,  and such other  matters  pertaining  to this Lease as may be  reasonably
requested by Landlord. Failure by Tenant to execute and deliver such certificate
shall constitute an acceptance of the Premises and acknowledgment by Tenant that
the statements  included are true and correct  without  exception.  Landlord and
Tenant intend that any  statement  delivered  pursuant to this  Paragraph may be
relied upon by any mortgagee, beneficiary, purchaser or prospective purchaser of
the Project or any interest therein.  The parties agree that Tenant's obligation
to  furnish  such  estoppel  certificates  in a  timely  fashion  is a  material
inducement  for  Landlord's  execution  of the  Lease,  and shall be an event of
default if Tenant fails to fully comply.

19.      SECURITY DEPOSIT.  Intentionally Omitted.


20.      TENANT'S REMEDIES.  The liability of Landlord to Tenant for any default
by Landlord  under the terms of this Lease are not personal  obligations  of the
individual or other partners,  directors, officers and shareholders of Landlord,
and Tenant agrees to look solely to  Landlord's  interest in the Project for the
recovery  of any amount  from  Landlord,  and shall not look to other  assets of
Landlord,  nor seek  recourse  against  the  assets of the  individual  or other
partners, directors, officers and shareholders of Landlord. Any lien obtained to
enforce any such judgment and any levy of execution thereon shall be subject and
subordinate to any lien, mortgage or deed of trust on the Project.

21.      ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING.

         A. General.  Tenant shall not assign or sublet the Premises or any part
thereof without  Landlord's prior written approval except as provided herein. If
Tenant desires to assign this Lease or sublet any or all of the Premises, Tenant
shall give Landlord written notice forty-five (45) days prior to the anticipated
effective date of the assignment or sublease.  Landlord shall then have a period
of thirty (30) days following receipt of such notice to notify Tenant in writing
that  Landlord  elects  either:  (1) to terminate  this Lease as to the space so
affected  as of the date so  requested  by  Tenant;  or (2) to permit  Tenant to
assign this Lease or sublet such space,  subject,  however,  to Landlord's prior
written  approval  of the  proposed  assignee  or  subtenant  and of any related
documents or agreements  associated with the assignment or sublease. If Landlord
should fail to notify  Tenant in writing of such  election  within said  period,
Landlord shall be deemed to have waived option (1) above,  but written  approval
by Landlord of the proposed assignee or subtenant shall be required. If Landlord
does not exercise the option provided in subitem (1) above,  Landlord's  consent
to a proposed assignment or sublet shall not be unreasonably  withheld.  Without
limiting  the other  instances  in which it may be  reasonable  for  Landlord to
withhold Landlord's consent to an assignment or subletting,  Landlord and Tenant
acknowledge  that it shall be  reasonable  for  Landlord to withhold  Landlord's
consent in the  following  instances:  The use of the Premises by such  proposed
assignee or subtenant would not be a permitted use or would increase the Parking
Density of the  Project;  the  proposed  assignee or  subtenant  is not of sound
financial  condition;  the  proposed  assignee or  subtenant  is a  governmental
agency;  the proposed assignee or subtenant does not have a good reputation as a
tenant of  property;  the  proposed  assignee or subtenant is a person with whom
Landlord  is  negotiating  to lease  space in the  Project;  the  assignment  or
subletting  would  entail any  alterations  which would  lessen the value of the
leasehold  improvements  in the  Premises;  or if  Tenant is in  default  of any
obligation of Tenant under this Lease,  or Tenant has defaulted under this Lease
on three (3) or more occasions  during any twelve (12) months preceding the date
that Tenant  shall  request  consent.  Failure by Landlord to approve a proposed
assignee  or  subtenant  shall not cause a  termination  of this  Lease.  Upon a
termination  under this Paragraph 21.A.,  Landlord may lease the Premises to any
party,  including  parties  with whom Tenant has  negotiated  an  assignment  or
sublease, without incurring any liability to Tenant.

         B. Bonus Rent. Any Rent or other consideration realized by Tenant under
any such sublease or assignment in excess of the Rent payable  hereunder,  after
amortization of a reasonable  brokerage  commission,  shall be divided and paid,
fifty  percent  (50%)  to  Tenant,  fifty  percent  (50%)  to  Landlord.  In any
subletting or assignment  undertaken by Tenant,  Tenant shall diligently seek to
obtain  the  maximum  rental  amount  available  in  the  marketplace  for  such
subletting or assignment.

         C.  Corporation.  If Tenant is a  corporation,  a transfer of corporate
shares by sale,  assignment,  bequest,  inheritance,  operation  of law or other
disposition (including such a transfer to or by a receiver or trustee in federal
or state  bankruptcy,  insolvency  or other  proceedings),  so as to result in a
change  in the  present  control  of  such  corporation  or  any  of its  parent
corporations by the person or

                                        8

<PAGE>
persons  owning  a  majority  of said  corporate  shares,  shall  constitute  an
assignment for purposes of this Lease.

         D.  Partnership.  If Tenant is a  partnership,  joint  venture or other
incorporated  business  form,  a transfer of the  interest of persons,  firms or
entities  responsible  for  managerial  control  of Tenant by sale,  assignment,
bequest, inheritance,  operation of law or other disposition, so as to result in
a change in the present  control of said entity  and/or a change in the identity
of the persons  responsible  for the general credit  obligations of said entity,
shall constitute an assignment for all purposes of this Lease.

         E. Liability.  No  assignment  or  subletting  by  Tenant shall relieve
Tenant of any obligation  under this Lease.  Any assignment or subletting  which
conflicts with the provisions hereof shall be void.

22.      AUTHORITY OF PARTIES.  Landlord  represents  and warrants  that  it has
full  right and  authority  to enter  into  this  Lease  and to  perform  all of
Landlords's  obligations  hereunder.  Tenant represents and warrants that it has
full right and authority to enter into this Lease and to perform all of Tenant's
obligations hereunder.

23.      CONDEMNATION.

         A. Condemnation  Resulting  In  Termination.   If   the  whole  or  any
substantial part of the Project of which the Premises are a part should be taken
or condemned for any public use under governmental law, ordinance or regulation,
or by right of eminent domain,  or by private purchase in lieu thereof,  and the
taking would  prevent or  materially  interfere  with the  Permitted  Use of the
Premises,  this Lease shall  terminate  and the Rent shall be abated  during the
unexpired  portion of this Lease,  effective  when the  physical  taking of said
Premises shall have  occurred.  If more than five percent (5%) of the floor area
of the Premises or thirty percent (30%) of the land area of the Project which is
not occupied by any building is taken by  condemnation,  Tenant may, at Tenant's
option,  terminate this Lease as of the date the condemning authority takes such
possession,  which  option is to be  exercised,  if at all,  by  written  notice
thereof to Landlord within ten (10) days after Landlord has given Tenant written
notice of such  taking (or in the absence of such  notice,  within ten (10) days
after the condemning authority shall have taken possession).

         B. Condemnation  Not  Resulting   In  Termination.  If a portion of the
Project of which the Premises  are a part should be taken or  condemned  for any
public use under any governmental law, ordinance, or regulation,  or by right of
eminent domain,  or by private  purchase in lieu thereof,  and this Lease is not
terminated as provided in Paragraph 23.A. above, this Lease shall not terminate,
but the Rent payable  hereunder during the unexpired  portion of the Lease shall
be reduced,  beginning on the date when the physical taking shall have occurred,
to such amount as may be fair and reasonable under all of the circumstances.

         C. Award.  Landlord  shall be entitled to any and all payment,  income,
rent,  award, or any interest  therein  whatsoever  which may be paid or made in
connection  with such  taking or  conveyance,  and  Tenant  shall  have no claim
against  Landlord or otherwise  for the value of any  unexpired  portion of this
Lease.  Notwithstanding  the foregoing,  any compensation  specifically  awarded
Tenant for loss of business, Tenant's personal property, moving costs or loss of
goodwill shall be and remain the property of Tenant.

24.      CASUALTY DAMAGE.

         A. General.  If the Premises or Building should be damaged or destroyed
by fire,  tornado or other casualty,  Tenant shall give immediate written notice
thereof to Landlord.  Within thirty (30) days after  Landlord's  receipt of such
notice,  Landlord shall notify Tenant whether in Landlord's opinion such repairs
can  reasonably be made either:  (1) within  ninety (90) days;  (2) in more than
ninety (90) days but in less than one hundred  eighty (180) days; or (3) in more
than one  hundred  eighty  (180) days from the date of such  notice.  Landlord's
determination shall be binding on Tenant.

         B. Less Than 90 Days. If the Premises or Building  should be damaged by
fire,  tornado or other  casualty,  but only to such extent that  rebuilding  or
repairs can in Landlord's  estimation be reasonably completed within ninety (90)
days after the date of such damage, this Lease shall not terminate, and provided
that insurance proceeds are available to fully repair the damage, Landlord shall
proceed to rebuild and repair the Premises in the manner determined by Landlord,
except that  Landlord  shall not be  required to rebuild,  repair or replace any
part of the partitions,  fixtures,  additions and other  leasehold  improvements
which may have been placed in, on or about the  Premises.  If the  Premises  are
untenantable  in whole  or in part  following  such  damage,  the  Rent  payable
hereunder  during  the  period in which  they are  untenantable  shall be abated
proportionately, to the extent the Premises are unfit for occupancy.

         C. Greater Than 90 Days. If the Premises or Building  should be damaged
by fire,  tornado or other casualty,  but only to such extent that rebuilding or
repairs can in Landlord's estimation be reasonably completed in more than ninety
(90) days but in less than one hundred eighty 180 days, then Landlord shall have
the option of either:  (1)  terminating the Lease effective upon the date of the
occurrence  of such damage,  in which event the Rent shall be abated  during the
unexpired  portion  of the  Lease;  or (2)  electing  to  rebuild  or repair the
Premises to substantially the condition in which they existed

                                        9
<PAGE>
prior to such damage,  provided that insurance proceeds are available,  to fully
repair the damage, except that Landlord shall not be required to rebuild, repair
or  replace  any  part  of  the  partitions,   fixtures,   additions  and  other
improvements  which may have been  placed in, on or about the  Premises.  If the
Premises are  untenantable  in whole or in part following such damage,  the Rent
payable  hereunder  during the period in which  they are  untenantable  shall be
abated  proportionately,  to the extent the Premises are unfit for occupancy. In
the event that  Landlord  should fail to complete  such  repairs and  rebuilding
within one hundred  eighty days (180) days after the date upon which Landlord is
notified by Tenant of such damage, such period of time to be extended for delays
caused by the fault or  neglect  of Tenant or  because  of acts of God,  acts of
public agencies,  labor disputes,  strikes,  fires, freight embargoes,  rainy or
stormy weather,  inability to obtain materials,  supplies or fuels, or delays of
the contractors or  subcontractors  or any other causes or contingencies  beyond
the  reasonable  control of Landlord,  Tenant may at Tenant's  option within ten
(10) days after the  expiration of such one hundred  eighty (180) day period (as
such may be  extended),  terminate  this Lease by delivering  written  notice of
termination  to Landlord  as Tenant's  exclusive  remedy,  whereupon  all rights
hereunder shall cease and terminate thirty (30) days after Landlord's receipt of
such termination notice.

         D. Greater  Than 180 Days.  If the  Premises or  Building  should be so
damaged by fire,  tornado or other casualty that rebuilding or repairs cannot in
Landlord's  estimation be completed  within one hundred  eighty (180) days after
such damage,  this Lease shall terminate and the Rent shall be abated during the
unexpired  portion of this Lease,  effective  upon the date of the occurrence of
such damage.

         E. Tenant's Fault. If the Premises or any other portion of the Building
are damaged by fire or other casualty resulting from the fault,  negligence,  or
breach  of this  Lease by  Tenant  or any of  Tenant's  Parties,  Base  Rent and
Additional  Rent shall not be  diminished  during the repair of such  damage and
Tenant  shall be liable to  Landlord  for the cost and expense of the repair and
restoration  of the Building  caused thereby to the extent such cost and expense
is not covered by insurance proceeds.

         F. Uninsured Casualty. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,
in the event that the Premises or Building are damaged or destroyed  and are not
fully  covered by the  insurance  proceeds  received by Landlord or in the event
that the  holder of any  indebtedness  secured  by a  mortgage  or deed of trust
covering the Premises  requires that the  insurance  proceeds be applied to such
indebtedness,  then in either case  Landlord  shall have the right to  terminate
this Lease by delivering  written  notice of termination to Tenant within thirty
(30) days after the date of notice to Landlord  that said damage or  destruction
is not  fully  covered  by  insurance  or such  requirement  is made by any such
holder, as the case may be, whereupon all rights and obligations hereunder shall
cease and terminate.

         G. Waiver.  Except as otherwise  provided in this  Paragraph 24, Tenant
hereby waives the provisions of Sections 1932(a),  1933(4), 1941 and 1942 of the
Civil Code of California.

25.      HOLDING  OVER.  If Tenant  shall retain  possession  of the Premises or
any portion thereof without  Landlord's  consent following the expiration of the
Lease or sooner  termination  for any reason,  then Tenant shall pay to Landlord
for each day of such  retention  double the amount of the daily rental as of the
last month prior to the date of  expiration  or  termination.  Tenant shall also
indemnify,  defend,  protect and hold Landlord harmless from any loss, liability
or cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, resulting from delay by Tenant in
surrendering the Premises, including, without limitation, any claims made by any
succeeding  tenant  founded  on such  delay.  Acceptance  of  Rent  by  Landlord
following  expiration  or  termination  shall not  constitute  a renewal of this
Lease,  and nothing  contained in this Paragraph 25 shall waive Landlord's right
of reentry or any other right.  Unless Landlord  consents in writing to Tenant's
holding  over,  Tenant  shall be only a Tenant  at  sufferance,  whether  or not
Landlord  accepts  any Rent from Tenant  while  Tenant is holding  over  without
Landlord's written consent.  Additionally, in the event that upon termination of
the Lease,  Tenant has not fulfilled its obligation  with respect to repairs and
cleanup of the  Premises or any other  Tenant  obligations  as set forth in this
Lease,  then Landlord shall have the right to perform any such obligations as it
deems  necessary at Tenant's  sole cost and expense,  and Tenant shall be liable
for all damages caused thereby, including, without limitation,  liability to any
new tenant or occupant of the  Premises or any part  thereof and lost rent which
Landlord  will  suffer  due to  delay  in  making  the  Premises  available  for
alterations and/or occupancy by the next tenant or occupant.

26.      DEFAULT.

         A. Events of Default.  The  occurrence  of any of the  following  shall
constitute an event of default on the part of Tenant:

                  (1) Abandonment.  Abandonment of the Premises for a continuous
period in excess of five (5)  days,  unless  Tenant is paying  all Rent when due
hereunder.  Tenant  waives any right to notice  Tenant  may have  under  Section
1951.3 of the Civil Code of the State of California, the terms of this Paragraph
26.A. being deemed such notice to Tenant as required by said Section 1951.3

                  (2) Nonpayment of Rent. Failure to pay any installment of Rent
or any other amount due and payable hereunder upon the date when said payment is
due.
                                       10
<PAGE>

                  (3) Other  Obligations.  Failure  to perform  any  obligation,
agreement  or covenant  under this Lease other than those  matters  specified in
subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this Paragraph 26.A.,  such failure  continuing for
thirty (30) days after written notice of such failure.

                  (4) General Assignment. A general assignment by Tenant for the
benefit of creditors.

                  (5) Bankruptcy.  The  filing  of  any  voluntary  petition  in
bankruptcy  by Tenant,  or the filing of an  involuntary  petition  by  Tenant's
creditors,  which  involuntary  petition  remains  undischarged  for a period of
thirty  (30)  days.  In the event  that  under  applicable  law the  trustee  in
bankruptcy  or Tenant has the right to affirm this Lease and continue to perform
the obligations of Tenant hereunder,  such trustee or Tenant shall, in such time
period as may be permitted by the bankruptcy court having jurisdiction, cure all
defaults of Tenant  hereunder  outstanding  as of the date of the  affirmance of
this Lease and provide to Landlord such adequate  assurances as may be necessary
to ensure Landlord of the continued  performance of Tenant's  obligations  under
this Lease.

                  (6) Receivership.  The  employment  of  a  receiver   to  take
possession of  substantially  all of Tenant's  assets or the  Premises,  if such
appointment  remains  undismissed or undischarged  for a period of ten (10) days
after the order therefor.

                  (7) Attachment.  The  attachment,  execution or other judicial
seizure of all or substantially all of Tenant's assets or the Premises,  if such
attachment or other seizure remains  undismissed or undischarged for a period of
ten (10) days after the levy thereof.

         B.       Remedies Upon Default.

                  (1)  Termination.  In the event of the occurrence of any event
of default,  Landlord shall have the right to give a written  termination notice
to  Tenant,  and on the  date  specified  in  such  notice,  Tenant's  right  to
possession shall  terminate,  and this Lease shall terminate unless on or before
such date all arrears of rental and all other sums  payable by Tenant under this
Lease and all costs and expenses incurred by or on behalf of Landlord  hereunder
shall have been paid by Tenant and all other  events of default of this Lease by
Tenant at the time existing shall have been fully  remedied to the  satisfaction
of Landlord. At any time after such termination, Landlord may recover possession
of the  Premises or any part thereof and expel and remove  therefrom  Tenant and
any other person  occupying the same, by any lawful means,  and again  repossess
and enjoy the Premises  without  prejudice to any of the remedies  that Landlord
may have under this Lease, or at law or equity by reason of Tenant's  default or
of such termination.

                  (2)  Continuation  After  Default.  Even  though  an  event of
default may have  occurred,  this Lease shall  continue in effect for so long as
Landlord does not terminate Tenant's right to possession under Paragraph 26.B(1)
hereof,  and Landlord may enforce all of  Landlord's  rights and remedies  under
this  Lease,  including  without  limitation,  the right to  recover  Rent as it
becomes due, and Landlord,  without  terminating this Lease, may exercise all of
the rights and remedies of a landlord  under Section 1951.4 of the Civil Code of
the State of  California or any successor  code  section.  Acts of  maintenance,
preservation  or efforts to lease the Premises or the  appointment of a receiver
upon  application  of Landlord to protect  Landlord's  interest under this Lease
shall not constitute an election to terminate Tenant's right to possession.

         C. Damages After Default. Should Landlord terminate this Lease pursuant
to the provisions of Paragraph  26.B.(1) hereof,  Landlord shall have the rights
and remedies of a Landlord  provided by Section  1951.2 of the Civil Code of the
State of  California,  or successor  code sections.  Upon such  termination,  in
addition  to any other  rights and  remedies to which  Landlord  may be entitled
under applicable law, Landlord shall be entitled to recover from Tenant: (1) the
worth at the time of award of the unpaid Rent and other  amounts  which had been
earned  at the time of  termination,  (2) the  worth at the time of award of the
amount by which the unpaid Rent which would have been earned  after  termination
until the time of award  exceeds the amount of such Rent loss that Tenant proves
could have been  reasonably  avoided;  (3) the worth at the time of award of the
amount by which the  unpaid  Rent for the  balance of the Term after the time of
award  exceeds  the  amount of such Rent loss that the  Tenant  proves  could be
reasonably  avoided;  and (4) any other amount necessary to compensate  Landlord
for all the detriment proximately caused by Tenant's failure to perform Tenant's
obligations  under this Lease or which, in the ordinary course of things,  would
be likely to result  therefrom.  The "worth at the time of award" of the amounts
referred  to in (1) and (2) above  shall be computed at the lesser of the "prime
rate," as announced from time to time by Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. (San Francisco),
plus five (5)  percentage  points,  or the maximum  interest rate allowed by law
("Applicable  Interest  Rate").  The  "worth at the time of award" of the amount
referred to in (3) above shall be  computed  by  discounting  such amount at the
Federal  Discount Rate of the Federal  Reserve Bank of San Francisco at the time
of the award.  If this Lease  provides  for any  periods  during the Term during
which Tenant is not required to pay Base Rent or if Tenant otherwise  receives a
Rent concession,  then upon the occurrence of an event of default,  Tenant shall
owe to  Landlord  the full  amount  of such  Base  Rent or  value  of such  Rent
concession,  plus interest at the Applicable Interest Rate,  calculated from the
date that such Base Rent or Rent concession would have been payable.

         D. Late Charge.  If any installment of Rent is not paid within five (5)
working  days  after  same  is due,  such  amount  shall  bear  interest  at the
Applicable Interest Rate from the date on which said

                                       11

<PAGE>

payment  shall be due  until  the  date on which  Landlord  shall  receive  said
payment.  In  addition,  Tenant  shall pay  Landlord a late charge equal to five
percent (5%) of the delinquency,  to compensate Landlord for the loss of the use
of the amount not paid and the  administrative  costs caused by the delinquency,
the parties  agreeing  that  Landlord's  damage by virtue of such  delinquencies
would be  difficult  to  compute  and the  amount  stated  herein  represents  a
reasonable estimate thereof. This provision shall not relieve Tenant of Tenant's
obligation to pay Rent at the time and in the manner herein specified.

         E.        Remedies Cumulative.  All rights, privileges and elections or
remedies  of the  parties  are  cumulative  and not  alternative,  to the extent
permitted by law and except as otherwise provided herein.

27.      LIENS.  Tenant shall keep the Premises  free from liens  arising out of
or related to work  performed,  materials or supplies  furnished or  obligations
incurred by Tenant or in  connection  with work made,  suffered or done by or on
behalf of Tenant in or on the  Premises  or  Project.  In the event that  Tenant
shall not, within ten (10) days following the imposition of any such lien, cause
the same to be  released  of record by  payment  or  posting  of a proper  bond,
Landlord  shall have, in addition to all other remedies  provided  herein and by
law, the right, but not the obligation, to cause the same to be released by such
means as Landlord shall deem proper,  including payment of the claim giving rise
to such lien.  All sums paid by  Landlord  on behalf of Tenant and all  expenses
incurred  by Landlord in  connection  therewith  shall be payable to Landlord by
Tenant on demand with interest at the Applicable  Interest Rate.  Landlord shall
have the right at all times to post and keep posted on the  Premises any notices
permitted  or required  by law, or which  Landlord  shall deem  proper,  for the
protection of Landlord,  the Premises, the Project and any other party having an
interest therein, from mechanics' and materialmen's liens, and Tenant shall give
Landlord  not less  than ten (10)  business  days  prior  written  notice of the
commencement  of any work in the Premises or Project  which could  lawfully give
rise to a claim for mechanics' or materialmen's liens.

28.      SUBSTITUTION.  Intentionally Omitted.

29.      TRANSFERS BY LANDLORD. In the event of a sale or conveyance by Landlord
of the Building or a  foreclosure  by any  creditor of Landlord,  the same shall
operate to release  Landlord  from any  liability  upon and obligate  Landlord's
successor-in-interest to any of the covenants or conditions, express or implied,
herein  contained  in favor of Tenant,  to the extent  required to be  performed
after the  passing of title to  Landlord's  successor-in-interest  during  their
respective period of ownership.  In such event,  Tenant agrees to look solely to
the  responsibility  of the  successor-in-interest  of Landlord under this Lease
with respect to the  performance of the covenants and duties of "Landlord" to be
performed after the passing of title to Landlord's  successor-in-interest.  This
Lease shall not be affected by any such sale and Tenant  agrees to attorn to the
purchaser  or  assignee.  Landlord's  successor(s)-in-interest  shall  not  have
liability  to  Tenant  with  respect  to  the  failure  to  perform  all  of the
obligations of "Landlord",  to the extent  required to be performed prior to the
date such successor(s)-in-interest became the owner of the Building.

30.      RIGHT  OF  LANDLORD  TO  PERFORM  TENANT'S  COVENANTS.   All  covenants
and  agreements  to be  performed by Tenant under any of the terms of this Lease
shall be performed  by Tenant at Tenant's  sole cost and expense and without any
abatement of Rent. If Tenant shall fail to pay any sum of money, other than Base
Rent and Basic Operating Cost,  required to be paid by Tenant hereunder or shall
fail to perform any other act on Tenant's  part to be performed  hereunder,  and
such failure shall  continue for five (5) days after notice thereof by Landlord,
Landlord  may,  but shall not be  obligated  to do so,  and  without  waiving or
releasing  Tenant  from any  obligations  of  Tenant,  make any such  payment or
perform any such act on Tenant's part to be made or performed.  All sums so paid
by Landlord and all necessary  incidental costs,  together with interest thereon
at the Applicable Interest Rate from the date of such payment by Landlord, shall
be payable to Landlord on demand,  and Tenant  covenants  to pay such sums,  and
Landlord  shall have, in addition to any other right or remedy of Landlord,  the
same rights and remedies in the event of the non-payment  thereof by Tenant,  as
in the case of default by Tenant in the payment of Base Rent and Basic Operating
Cost.

31.      WAIVER.  If either  Landlord or  Tenant waives the  performance  of any
term,  covenant or condition  contained in this Lease,  such waiver shall not be
deemed to be a waiver of any  subsequent  breach of the same or any other  term,
covenant or condition contained herein. The acceptance of Rent by Landlord shall
not constitute a waiver of any preceding breach by Tenant of any term,  covenant
or condition of this Lease, regardless of Landlord's knowledge of such preceding
breach at the time Landlord  accepted such Rent.  Failure by Landlord to enforce
any of the terms,  covenants or  conditions of this Lease for any length of time
shall not be  deemed to waive or to  decrease  the right of  Landlord  to insist
thereafter  upon strict  performance by Tenant.  Waiver by Landlord or Tenant of
any term,  covenant or  condition  contained in this Lease may only be made by a
written document signed by Landlord or Tenant, respectively.

32.      NOTICES. Each provision of this Lease or of any applicable governmental
laws, ordinances,  regulations and other requirements with reference to sending,
mailing or  delivery  of any notice or the making of any  payment by Landlord or
Tenant  to the  other  shall  be  deemed  to be  complied  with  when and if the
following steps are taken:

         A. Rent. All Rent and other  payments  required to be made by Tenant to
Landlord  hereunder shall be payable to Landlord at the address set forth in the
Basic Lease Information, or at

                                       12

<PAGE>
such other  address as Landlord may specify from time to time by written  notice
delivered in accordance herewith.  Tenant's obligation to pay Rent and any other
amounts to Landlord under the terms of this Lease shall not be deemed  satisfied
until such Rent and other amounts have been actually received by Landlord.

         B. Other. All notices, demands, consents and approvals which may or are
required to be given by either party to the other  hereunder shall be in writing
and either  personally  delivered,  sent by  commercial  overnight  courier,  or
mailed, certified or registered,  postage prepaid, and addressed to the party to
be  notified  at the  address  for such party as  specified  in the Basic  Lease
Information  or to such other place as the party to be notified may from time to
time  designate  by at least  fifteen (15) days notice to the  notifying  party.
Notices  shall be deemed  served  upon  receipt or  refusal to accept  delivery.
Tenant  appoints as its agent to receive the service of all default  notices and
notice of commencement of unlawful detainer  proceedings the person in charge of
or apparently in charge of occupying the Premises at the time,  and, if there is
no such person,  then such service may be made by attaching the same on the main
entrance of the Premises.

33.      ATTORNEYS'  FEES. In the event that Landlord places the enforcement  of
this Lease, or any part thereof, or the collection of any Rent due, or to become
due  hereunder,  or recovery of  possession  of the  Premises in the hands of an
attorney,  Tenant shall pay to  Landlord,  upon  demand,  Landlord's  reasonable
attorneys'  fees and court costs.  In any action which Landlord or Tenant brings
to enforce its respective rights hereunder, the unsuccessful party shall pay all
costs incurred by the prevailing party, including reasonable attorneys' fees, to
be fixed by the court, and said costs and attorneys' fees shall be a part of the
judgment in said action.

34.      SUCCESSORS  AND ASSIGNS.  This Lease shall be binding upon and inure to
the benefit of Landlord,  its successors and assigns,  and shall be binding upon
and inure to the benefit of Tenant, its successors, and to the extent assignment
is approved by Landlord hereunder, Tenant's assigns.

35.      FORCE  MAJEURE.  Whenever  a period  of time is herein  prescribed  for
action to be taken by  Landlord  or Tenant,  such  party  shall not be liable or
responsible  for, and there shall be excluded from the  computation for any such
period of time,  any delays due to strikes,  riots,  acts of God,  shortages  of
labor or materials,  war, governmental laws,  regulations or restrictions or any
other causes of any kind  whatsoever  which are beyond the control of such party
(financial  inability  to perform  excepted);  provided,  however,  that nothing
contained in this Section 35 shall excuse or delay the proper and timely payment
of Rent by Tenant to Landlord.

36.      BROKERAGE  COMMISSION.  Landlord  shall pay a brokerage  commission  to
Broker in  accordance  with a separate  agreement  between  Landlord and Broker.
Tenant warrants to Landlord that Tenant's sole contact with Landlord or with the
Premises in connection with this transaction has been directly with Landlord and
Broker,  and that no other  broker or  finder  can  properly  claim a right to a
commission or a finder's fee based upon contacts between the claimant and Tenant
with  respect to Landlord or the  Premises.  Tenant shall  indemnify,  defend by
counsel  acceptable  to Landlord,  protect and hold  Landlord  harmless from and
against any loss,  cost or expense,  including,  but not limited to,  attorneys'
fees and costs,  resulting  from any claim for a fee or commission by any broker
or finder  which claims it has dealt with or has a  relationship  with Tenant in
connection with the Premises and this Lease other than Broker.

37.      MISCELLANEOUS.

         A.  General.  The term  "Tenant" or any pronoun  used in place  thereof
shall  indicate and include the  masculine  or feminine,  the singular or plural
number,  individuals,  firms or corporations,  and their respective  successors,
executors,  administrators  and  permitted  assigns,  according  to the  context
hereof.

         B. Time.  Time is of the  essence  regarding  this Lease and all of its
provisions.

         C. Choice of Law.  This Lease shall in all  respects be governed by the
laws of the State of California.

         D. Entire Agreement. This Lease, together with its Exhibits, supersedes
in its entirety the Lease  between  Landlord and Tenant also dated  December 19,
1997, containing typewritten and handwritten inserts and cross-outs. The purpose
of this Lease is to restate said Lease in its entirety,  and this Lease contains
all  the   agreements  of  the  parties   hereto  and  supersedes  any  previous
negotiations.  There  have  been  no  representations  made by the  Landlord  or
understandings made between the parties other than those set forth in this Lease
and its Exhibits.

         E.  Modification.  This Lease may not be  modified  except by a written
instrument by the parties hereto.

         F. Severability.  If, for any reason whatsoever,  any of the provisions
hereof shall be unenforceable or ineffective,  all of the other provisions shall
be and remain in full force and effect.

         G.  Recordation.  Tenant  shall not  record  this Lease or a short form
memorandum hereof.
                                       13
<PAGE>

         H.  Examination  of Lease.  Submission of this Lease to Tenant does not
constitute an option or offer to lease and this Lease is not effective otherwise
until execution and delivery by both Landlord and Tenant.

         I.  Accord and  Satisfaction.  No payment by Tenant of a lesser  amount
than the Rent nor any endorsement on any check or letter  accompanying any check
or payment of Rent shall be deemed an accord and satisfaction of full payment of
Rent, and Landlord may accept such payment without prejudice to Landlord's right
to recover the balance of such Rent or to pursue other remedies.

         J. Easements.  Landlord may grant easements on the Project and dedicate
for public use portions of the Project without Tenant's  consent;  provided that
no such grant or dedication shall  substantially  interfere with Tenant's use of
the Premises.  Upon  Landlord's  demand,  Tenant shall execute,  acknowledge and
deliver  to  Landlord  documents,  instruments,  maps  and  plats  necessary  to
effectuate Tenant's covenants hereunder.

         K. Drafting and Determination Presumption. The parties acknowledge that
this Lease has been agreed to by both  parties,  that both  Landlord  and Tenant
have  consulted  with or had the  opportunity  to consult  with  attorneys  with
respect  to the terms of this  Lease and that no  presumption  shall be  created
against  Landlord  because  Landlord  drafted  this Lease.  Except as  otherwise
specifically set forth in this Lease, with respect to any consent, determination
or  estimation  of Landlord  required in this Lease or  requested  of  Landlord,
Landlord's consent, determination or estimation shall be made in Landlord's good
faith opinion, whether objectively reasonable or unreasonable.

         L.  Exhibits.  Exhibits A, B, C, D, E and F attached  hereto are hereby
incorporated herein by this reference.

         M. No Light,  Air or View  Easement.  Any diminution or shutting off of
light, air or view by any structure which may be erected on lands adjacent to or
in the vicinity of the Building  shall in no way affect this Lease or impose any
liability on Landlord.

         N. No Third Party Benefit.  This Lease is a contract  between  Landlord
and Tenant and nothing herein is intended to create any third party benefit.


38.      ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS.

         First Addendum to Lease

         Exhibit "A"       Floor Plan
         Exhibit "B"       Work Letter
         Exhibit "C"       Standard Specifications
         Exhibit "D"       Atherton Center Sign Policy
         Exhibit "E"       Rules and Regulations
         Exhibit "F"       Hazardous Materials / Wastes


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Lease the day and year
first above written.


"Landlord"

STANFORD RANCH I, LLC

         By:  _________________________________________________________________
         Name: ________________________________________________________________
         Title: _______________________________________________________________



"Tenant'

SPECTRIAN CORPORATION

By:  __________________________________________________________________________
              Stephen B. Greenspan, Chief Operating Officer


         By: __________________________________________________________________
         Name: ________________________________________________________________
         Title: _______________________________________________________________

                                       14

<PAGE>

                                    EXHIBIT A

                                   FLOOR PLAN



















                                (TO BE ATTACHED)





                                Page 1 of 2 Pages


<PAGE>




                                    EXHIBIT A

                                    SITE PLAN




















                                (TO BE ATTACHED)





                                Page 2 of 2 Pages


<PAGE>
                                    EXHIBIT B

                                   WORK LETTER

         This Work Letter shall set forth the terms and  conditions  relating to
the construction of the tenant improvements in the Premises. This Work Letter is
essentially   organized   chronologically   and  addresses  the  issues  of  the
construction of the Premises,  in sequence, as such issues will arise during the
actual construction of the Premises.

                                    SECTION 1

                     CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS FOR THE PREMISES

         Landlord  shall cause the  improvements  in the  Premises  (the "Tenant
Improvements") to be constructed,  at Landlord's sole cost and expense, pursuant
to the specifications  outlined in the preliminary  drawings as prepared by CHMD
dated November 6, 1997, as shown on Exhibit "A". Tenant shall make no changes or
modifications to the Approved Working drawings without the prior written consent
of Landlord, which consent may be withheld in Landlord's sole discretion if such
change or  modification  would  directly  or  indirectly  delay the  Substantial
Completion,  as that term is defined in Section 2.1 of this Work Letter,  of the
Premises  or  increase  the  cost  of  designing  or  constructing   the  Tenant
Improvements.  In  the  event  Tenant  makes  changes  to  Exhibit  "A"  causing
allowances  to exceed that in  Paragraph  5 of the First  Addendum  Lease,  such
excess shall be amortized  as noted in Paragraph 5 of the First  Addendum  Lease
contained herein.

                                    SECTION 2

                     COMPLETION OF THE TENANT IMPROVEMENTS:
                                COMMENCEMENT DATE

         2.1 Ready for  Occupancy.  The  Premises  shall be  deemed  "Ready  for
Occupancy" upon the Substantial Completion of the Premises. For purposes of this
Lease,  "Substantial Completion" of the Premises shall occur upon the completion
of  construction  of the Tenant  Improvements  in the  Premises  pursuant to the
Approved  Working  Drawings,  with the exception of any punch list items and any
tenant fixtures, work-stations, built-in furniture, or equipment to be installed
by Tenant or under the supervision of the Contractor.

         2.2 Delay of the  Substantial  Completion  of the  Premises.  Except as
provided in this Section 2.2, the Commencement Date shall occur by June 1, 1998.
If there shall be a delay or there are delays in the  Substantial  Completion of
the Premises or in the  occurrence of any of the other  conditions  precedent to
the Commencement  Date, as set forth in the Base Lease Information of the Lease,
as a direct, indirect,  partial, or total result of the following (collectively,
"Tenant Delays"):

                  2.2.1 Tenant's  failure to timely approve any matter requiring
Tenant's approval;

                  2.2.2 A breach by  Tenant of the terms of this Work  Letter or
the Lease;

                  2.2.3  Tenant's  request for changes in the  Approved  Working
Drawings;

                  2.2.4 Changes in any of the Approved  Working Drawings because
the same do not comply with applicable laws;

                  2.2.5 Tenant's requirement for materials, components, finishes
or improvements which are not available in a commercially  reasonable time given
the  anticipated  Commencement  Date,  as set forth in the  Lease,  or which are
different  from, or not included in,  Landlord's  standard  improvement  package
items for the Building.

                  2.2.6 Changes to the base, shell and core work of the Building
required by the Approved Working Drawings or any changes thereto; or

                  2.2.7 Any other acts or omissions of Tenant, or its agents, or
employees;

then,  notwithstanding  anything to the  contrary set forth in the Lease or this
Work Letter and regardless of the actual date of the  Substantial  Completion of
the  Premises,  the  Commencement  Date  shall  be  deemed  to be the  date  the
Commencement Date would have occurred if no Tenant Delay or Delays, as set forth
above, had occurred, subject to receiving a Temporary Certificate of Occupancy.


                                    SECTION 3

                                  MISCELLANEOUS

         3.1 Tenant's Entry Into the Premises  Prior to Substantial  Completion.
Provided that Tenant and its agents do not interfere with  Contractor's  work in
the Building and the Premises, Contractor shall

                                Page 1 of 2 Pages
<PAGE>


allow Tenant access to the Premises prior to the  Substantial  Completion of the
Premises for the purpose of Tenant installing  equipment or fixtures  (including
Tenant's data and telephone and other items) in the Premises.  Prior to Tenant's
entry into the Premises as permitted by the terms of this Section,  Tenant shall
submit a schedule to Landlord and Contractor, for their approval, which schedule
shall  detail the  timing  and  purpose of  Tenant's  entry.  Tenant  shall hold
Landlord  harmless from and indemnify,  protect and defend Landlord  against any
loss or damage to the  Building  or Premises  and against  injury to any persons
caused by Tenant's actions pursuant to this Section.

         3.2 Tenant's Agents. All  subcontractors,  laborers,  materialmen,  and
suppliers  retained  directly by Tenant shall  conduct  their  activities in and
around the Premises, Building and Property in a harmonious relationship with all
other  subcontractors,  laborers,  materialmen  and  suppliers at the  Premises,
Building and Property.

         3.3  Time  of  the  Essence  in  This  Work  Letter.  Unless  otherwise
indicated,  all references  herein to a "number of days" shall mean and refer to
calendar  days. In all instances  where Tenant is required to approve or deliver
an item, if no written  notice of approval is given or the item is not delivered
within the stated time period,  at  Landlord's  sole option,  at the end of such
period the item shall  automatically  be deemed  approved or delivered by Tenant
and the next succeeding time period shall commence.

         3.4  Tenant's  Lease  Default.  Notwithstanding  any  provision  to the
contrary  contained in the Lease, if a Default by Tenant as described in Section
26 of this Lease, or a default by Tenant under this Work Letter, has occurred at
any time on or before the  Substantial  Completion of the Premises,  then (i) in
addition to all other rights and remedies  granted to Landlord  pursuant to this
Lease,  Landlord  shall  have  the  right  to  cause  Contractor  to  cease  the
construction  of the Premises (in which case Tenant shall be responsible for any
delay in the Substantial Completion of the Premises caused by such work stoppage
as set forth in Section 5 of this Work Letter),  and (ii) all other  obligations
of  Landlord  under the terms of this Work Letter  shall be forgiven  until such
time as such default is cured pursuant to the terms of the Lease.



Agreed and Acknowledged:

LANDLORD:         STANFORD RANCH I, LLC


BY:                                                           DATE:
   ---------------------------------                               -------------
ITS:
   ---------------------------------

TENANT:  SPECTRIAN INC.


BY:                                                           DATE:
   ---------------------------------                               -------------
ITS:
   ---------------------------------

BY:                                                           DATE:
   ---------------------------------                               -------------
ITS:
   ---------------------------------




                                Page 2 of 2 Pages

<PAGE>
                                    Exhibit C

                             Stanford Business Park
                             Standard Specifications

I.       Walls

         A.       Demising Walls

                  1.       Framing

                           a.       Demising  wall shall be framed from finished
                                    floor to the underside of the roof deck. All
                                    demising  walls  shall be attached at top to
                                    the roof deck and to the floor.

                           b.       All  demising  walls  shall be framed with a
                                    stud  of  sufficient  size,  gauge  and at a
                                    spacing  such that  diagonal  bracing is not
                                    required.  Walls to a height of 16'0"  shall
                                    be framed with 3-5/8" 20 GA.  metal studs at
                                    2'-0" on center. Walls to heights from 16'0"
                                    to  25'-4"  shall be  framed  with 6" 18 GA.
                                    metal  studs at 16" on center.  Walls  above
                                    25'-4"  shall be framed with 6" 20 GA. metal
                                    studs at 16" and/or 12" as required  per the
                                    Table For Non-bearing  Screwable Steel Studs
                                    and  Joists  contained  in the  ICBO  Report
                                    #2274.

                  2.       Gypsum Wall Board

                           a.       Wall  shall be 5/8" Type "X"  gypsum  board.
                                    Fine tape finish.  U.O.N.  Gypsum wall board
                                    shall be placed on the opposite side U.O.N.

                           b.       Insulate walls for sound absorption R-11.

         B.       Interior Office Walls

                  1.       Framing

                           a.       Interior  walls shall be framed to either 6"
                                    above the finished ceiling or to the ceiling
                                    grid.  If to the grid,  all walls to receive
                                    edging for uniformity of appearance.

                           b.       Perimeter  office walls shall be framed full
                                    height to roof deck.  Sheetrock applied both
                                    sides to 6" above grid and to warehouse side
                                    only  balance  of the  frame.  See  Demising
                                    Walls above for requirements.


                           c.       Insulate walls for sound absorption R-11.

                  2.       Gypsum Wall Board

                           a.       Walls shall be 5/8" Type "X" gypsum board.

                  3.       Furred Walls

                           a.       Furred walls to be insulated with R-13.

         C.       Wall Finishes

                  1.       All office walls shall be textured with a light spray
                           texture.  Walls shall be scaled and painted  with two
                           coats of latex flat. Paint to be Kelly-Moore, Product
                           #555. Verify color with Tenant and Owner.

                  2.       Restroom  walls shall be textured  with a light spray
                           texture.  Wainscot  at  4'-0"  shall  be  flat  white
                           "Marlite,"  with brushed  aluminum trim. All restroom
                           ceilings  shall be 8' U.O.N.  All restroom  walls and
                           ceilings  shall receive two coats  semi-gloss  enamel
                           finish paint with light spray  texture.  Verify color
                           with Owner.  All restroom walls to be sound insulated
                           with R-11.

         D. All door openings shall use 16-gauge king stud.


                                Page 1 of 6 Pages


<PAGE>

II.      CEILINGS

         A.       Restrooms

                  1.       Framing  shall be 4" 25 GA.  metal  joist at 1'-4" on
                           center.  Maximum  span 8"- 9". For spans in excess of
                           8"-9" refer to the tables shown on the plans.

                  2.       Ceilings  shall be covered  with 5/8" type "X" gypsum
                           board.

                  3.       Finish  shall be light spray  texture  with two coats
                           semi-gloss latex paint.

                  4.       Insulate wall with R-11 insulation.  Insulate ceiling
                           with R-19 insulation.

                  5.       Ceiling height shall be 8'-0" above finished floor.

         B.       Office

                  1.       Ceilings  shall  be  2' x 4'  T-bar  white  suspended
                           ceiling system. 10' above finished floor.

                  2.       Ceiling tiles

                           a.       Standard  shall be Second Look II Acoustical
                                    ceiling  tile by  Armstrong  at 9'-0"  above
                                    finished  floor  in  office  area and 10' in
                                    tech area or at top of storefront if higher.
                                    Provide shims,  routered edges and detailing
                                    per manufacturer's specs.

                           b.       Alternate  shall be Standard  Fissured tiles
                                    for large  work  areas.  This tile  shall be
                                    used only when indicated on the plans.

                  3.       Provide R-19 unfaced fiberglass  insulation above all
                           lay-in  ceilings.  Cut  in  insulation  around  light
                           fixtures. If roof insulation is existing or specified
                           on the plans,  consult with Lincoln  Property Company
                           representatives   to  determine  if  lay-in   ceiling
                           insulation above grid is required.

                  4.       Provide  Seismic  Compression  Posts as  required  by
                           code.  All ceiling  fixtures  shall be supported  per
                           U.B.C. standards.


III.     FLOOR COVERINGS

         A.       Office

                  1.       Carpet shall be either "Shaw" or "Designweave" 26 oz.
                           yarn  weight  textured  loop or 32 oz yarn weight cut
                           pile in lobby area only. Verify color and choice with
                           Owner. All carpet shall receive 2-1/2" rubber top set
                           base U.O.N.

                  2.       Sheet  Vinyl  shall  be  Armstrong   "Classic  Corlon
                           Commercial  Sheet  Flooring"  or approved  equivalent
                           with 6" coving or approved  equal.  Verify color with
                           Owner.

                  3.       Vinyl  Composition Tile shall be Armstrong  "Standard
                           Exoclon" or approved  equivalent  with 2-1/2"  Rubber
                           base or approved equal. Verify color with Owner.

         B.       Warehouse

                  1.       Warehouse  floors shall be sealed with a  chlorinated
                           rubber sealer.  Contractor shall verify the condition
                           of the existing floors prior to submitting proposals.


IV.      DOORS

         A.       Door Frames

                  1.       All door  frames  to be Timely  pre-finished  frames.
                           Finish to match  storefronts  unless otherwise noted.
                           All frames shall be provided with a one (1) hour fire

                                               Page 2 of 6 Pages
<PAGE>

                           rating.  Frames  shall  have a  standard  certificate
                           plate indicating the one (1) hour rating.

         B.       Interior Doors

                  1.       Interior doors shall be 3'-0" x 7'0".  Doors shall be
                           paint  grade  plain by Cal- Wood.  All doors shall be
                           supplied with 20-minute label.

         C.       Hardware

                  1. Latchsets (no lock) to be Schlage  "Levon" "A" series (626)
satin bronze finish.

                  2. Hinges to match  hardware  finish.  Provide  1-1/2 pair for
each door.

                  3.       Doors to be  installed in a rated  condition  (1-hour
                           condition required by code) shall be installed with a
                           closer. Closer shall be 1.CN#1-160#1 aluminum. finish
                           to match door hardware unless otherwise noted.

                  4.       All private  offices  shall receive coat hook on back
                           of door, Ameruck BP 3460- 26.

V.       RESTROOM ACCESSORIES

         A.       All restrooms to include the following accessories:

                  1.       Towel Dispenser  shall be surface  mounted  stainless
                           steel. Provide Bobrich #B262, McKinney Parker #610 or
                           approved equal.

                  2.       Seat  Cover   Dispenser   shall  be  surface  mounted
                           stainless  steel.  Provide  Bobrich  #B221,  McKinney
                           Parker #610 or approved equal.

                  3.       Toilet Paper  Dispenser  shall be Bobrich  #B-2740 or
                           approved equal.

                  4.       Mirror.  Bobrich #B165 or approved equal.  Size shall
                           be 24" x 36".

                  5.       Grab bars.  Bobrich  #B6806,  36" and 42" or approved
                           equal.

                  6.       Feminine  Napkin  Disposal  shall be surface  mounted
                           stainless  steel.  Provide  McKinney  Parker  #610 or
                           approved equal. (Woman's restroom only.)

VI.      PLUMBING

         A.       All water piping shall be copper  U.O.N.  All hot water piping
                  shall be insulated with Armaflex form insulation.

         B.       Water closets to be American  Standard  elongated  water saver
                  Cadet #2108.408 and Olsonite #95 or approved equal.

         C.       Urinals to be American  Standard - water saver Allbrook Urinal
                  #65-40.017  w/Sloan  Royal  #180-15  flush  valve or  approved
                  equal.

         D.       Lavatories to be American  Standard Lucern lavatory  #0355.012
                  wall hung with 2103.620  faucet with 4" wrist blade handles or
                  approved equal.

                  Lavatories in counter top shall be American  Standard "Horizon
                  Lavatory"  #3301.025 with 2103.1459 faucet with 4" wrist blade
                  handles and pop-up drain. Verify color of counter with Owner.

         E.       Hospitality  sink when called for shall be Elkay #1.R-1918 19"
                  x 18" x 7-12" D stainless  steel bar sink with LK-2223  deluxe
                  two handle bar faucet with 9" high traditional swing spout and
                  LK-367  small  basket  strainer.  Sink shall be  installed  in
                  plastic laminate counter unless otherwise noted.

         F.       Drinking  fountain  when called for shall be Haws barrier free
                  water cooler model #11CBF7.

         G.       Service  sink  when  called  for  shall be  American  Standard
                  "Lakewell"  #7692.023  with  8769.018  rim board and  8340.242
                  faucet.

                                Page 3 of 6 Pages


<PAGE>

         H.       All hot water  heaters to be National  Steel  Construction  or
                  approved equal.

         I.       Showers where called for.  Handicapped, prefabricated Kimstock
                  Southwest, Inc. Verify model number with Owner.

         J.       All  toilet  partitions  where  called for shall be Sony Metal
                  Normandie   or   Knicherbocker   New  Yorker,   baked   enamel
                  floor-braced  with coat hook and  bumper.  Verify  color  with
                  owner.

         K.       Breakroom sink to have 1/2 HP (min.) garbage disposal.

         L.       Water main and branch lines to have valve shutoffs.


VII.     ELECTRICAL

         A.       Designed  and  installed  in  accordance  with the  California
                  Energy Act - title 24, 225 amp, 208 volt service  typical,  42
                  circuit distribution panel.

         B.       Power   distributed  as  required  by  Tenant  for  warehouse,
                  assembly and manufacturing equipment,  appliance operating and
                  special  office   machinery   shall  be  ceiling  hung  U.O.N.
                  Subpanels  and  transformers  shall be  located  in the tenant
                  space per code.

         C.       Warehouse.   Flush  mounted  ('296  strip   fluorescent  light
                  fixtures by  Lithonia  or)  approved  equal in areas with open
                  ceiling per Exhibit "A".

         D.       Ceiling mounted fixture at restroom-Lithonia  Wallens, #1.B240
                  120A.

         E.       Other  lighting  as  required  by Tenant or code.  Same  light
                  fixtures to be used as called out in C. above except  provided
                  on  8'  x 8'  centers  for  shipping/receiving  area  will  be
                  provided.

         F.       Provide  ivory  plates  and  covers  for  all  power  outlets,
                  switches  or  plates.  Provide  rings  and  pull  wires at all
                  telephone, computer and cable (C.R.T.) outlets as indicated on
                  plan.  All switches to be at 46" on center,  all outlets to be
                  at 18" on  center,  all  warehouse  outlets  at 26" on center.
                  Provide  stainless steel covers in manufacturing and warehouse
                  areas.

         G.       Illuminated exit signs as required by Tenant or code.

         H.       Office  lighting  is by 2' x 4' recessed  mounted  fluorescent
                  ceiling fixtures,  Lithonia  2GT340A12-277V or equal, approved
                  by Owner, with acrylic prism lens.  Lighting to comply to T-24
                  Energy Standards. Pattern shall be 8' x 8'.

         I.       2-4" PVC chase and pull line for telephone from T.B.B. to T.I.
                  space.  Provide 4' x 8' x 3/4'  backboard at location shown on
                  drawings.

         J.       Any switch gear used in Electric  room that will impede future
                  T.I.  additions  is  not  permissible  without  prior  written
                  permission from Landlord.

         K.       1500 Amps/480 Volt/3-Phase power to be allocated to Spectrian.
                  Of the remaining 500 Amps/480  Volt/3-Phase  power,  Spectrian
                  shall be  entitled  to a pro rata  share  basis of this  power
                  should Spectrian expand into the adjacent space in the future.

VIII.    FINISHES/SPECIALTIES

         A.       Special office wall or floor finishes.  See T.I.  drawings for
                  specifications.

         B.       Lunch room,  conference room,  coffee or wet bar cabinetry and
                  plumbing and appliances as required by Tenant.

         C.       Refer  to  tenant   improvement   plans  for   locations   and
                  specifications.

         D.       All exterior  windows to receive 1"  mini-blinds to be outside
                  mounted on the window mullion. Each mullion to receive one (1)
                  mini-blind from ceiling height to floor.
                  Verify color and brand with Owner.

IX.      FIRE SPRINKLERS

                                Page 4 of 6 Pages


<PAGE>

         A.       Designed in accordance with local codes.  Sprinkler pipe drops
                  are extended from  existing fire lines in the roof  structure.
                  Sprinkler heads are semi-recessed  chrome with chrome color to
                  finish. Fire hoses, extinguisher and detectors are provided as
                  required by code or tenant.  Sprinkler heads shall be centered
                  in 2 x 2 section of 2 x 4 Second Look II ceiling tile.


                            HVAC PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

         1.       Load  calculations  for  standard  office  space/manufacturing
                  space/warehouse space:

                  A.       Use  ASHRAE   fundamentals  summer  design  dry  bulb
                           temperature at 0.5%.

                  B.       Indoor  design   conditions  are  to  be  72  degrees
                           Fahrenheit   50%  R.H.  for  summer  and  70  degrees
                           Fahrenheit for winter.

                  C.       Lighting  internal  load  allowance:  1.5  watts  per
                           square foot.

                  D.       Miscellaneous equipment internal load allowance:  3.0
                           watts per square foot.

                  E.       People load allowance:  120 square foot per person or
                           actual count, whichever is greater.

                  F.       Minimum ventilation allowance:  20CFM per person.

         2.       HVAC  systems  shall be fully  zoned for  exposure,  usage and
                  occupancy.

         3.       All roof  mounted  HVAC units to be  mounted  above a glue-lam
                  unless otherwise approved structurally designed to accommodate
                  load.

         4.       Toilet  rooms to be  exhausted  at 12 air  changes  per  hour,
                  exhausted to exterior.

         5.       Air conditioning equipment to be Carrier or Trane.

         6.       Exhaust fans to be sized properly.

         7.       Supply diffusers to be modular air core type; Titus, Metal-Air
                  or equal.

         8.       HVAC ductwork to be metallic.

         9.       Discharge and intake ductwork at air  conditioning  unit shall
                  be  internally  lined with 1" - 1-1/2 lb. per cubic foot vinyl
                  face,  black matt insulation for sound  attenuation  (designed
                  for proper acoustical attenuation).

         10.      Wrap all unlined  concealed supply and return duct with 2" 3/4
                  lb. per cubic foot insulation and foil vapor barrier.

         11.      Wire  flexible  duct is  ONLY to be used at the  supply/return
                  outlet (maximum length 10').

         12.      Rectangular elbows to be installed with directional vanes.

         13.      Rectangular  taps to be constructed  with a 45 degree upstream
                  side.

         14.      All supply branches to have a manual volume damper.

         15.      Support  for all piping and  ductwork  shall be in  accordance
                  with SMACNA  "Guidelines for Seismic  Restraints of Mechanical
                  Systems."

         16.      Intentionally omitted.

         17.      Basic HVAC  control  system  shall be  Honeywell  programmable
                  timeclock-thermostat configuration.

         18.      Each thermostat is to be installed with a 3-hour by-pass timer
                  for overtime usage.

         19.      Air balance shall be done by the installing  contractor and to
                  provide balance report to Tenant.

                                Page 5 of 6 Pages


<PAGE>

         20.      Mechanical  contractor  is to comply with all ASHRAE,  SMACNA,
                  UBC and local code requirements.

         21.      All material and workmanship provided by mechanical contractor
                  is to be warranted to be free from defects for a period of one
                  (1) year.

         22.      All gas meters to be approved by Landlord prior to selection.

         23.      All duct joints shall be sealed airtight.

         24.      Submit Title 24 plans, calls for permit.

         25.      Provide slot diffusers in lobby.

         26.      Fire/smoke  dampers and detectors to be provided and installed
                  by mechanical contractor. To be constructed as per code.

         27.      Condensate drain to be approved receptacle/location.





                                Page 6 of 6 Pages


<PAGE>



                                    EXHIBIT D

                           ATHERTON CENTER SIGN POLICY

                  Tenant Suite Identification - Window Graphics




Height:                    Tenant: Copy - 4".

General                    Placement:  All copy  centered onto glass area to the
                           left   or   right   of   entrance   door,   whichever
                           appropriate.

Copy                       Placement:  5'0" from  floor to middle of sign.  Copy
                           not to exceed a 3" margin on right and left sides.

Material:                  Vinyl

Color:                     Matte white

Typeface:                  Tenant copy - Century Bold, upper and lower case.

Copy:                      Signage  shall be limited to the name of the  tenant,
                           as detailed in the lease,  or the  publicly  recorded
                           assumed  business  name of the tenant,  and shall not
                           include a descriptive advertisement.

Responsibility:            Tenant: signage shall be paid by the tenant.





<PAGE>

                                   EXHIBIT "E"

                              RULES AND REGULATIONS


1. Lessee shall not obstruct or  interfere  with the rights of other  lessees of
the Project,  or of persons having business in the Project, or in any way injure
or annoy such lessees or persons.

2.  Lessee  shall not commit any act or permit  anything in or about the Project
which shall or might  subject  Lessor to any  liability  or  responsibility  for
injury to any person or property by reason of any  business or  operation  being
carried on, in or about the Project or for any other reason.

3. Lessee shall not use the Project for lodging,  sleeping,  cooking, or for any
immoral or illegal  purpose or for any purpose that will damage the Project,  or
the reputation  thereof,  or for any purposes other than those  specified in the
Lease.

4. Canvassing, soliciting and peddling in the Project are prohibited, and Lessee
shall cooperate to prevent such activities.

5. Lessee  shall not bring or keep  within the  Project  any animal,  bicycle or
motorcycle.

6. Except as expressly provided in this Lease,  Lessee shall not cook or prepare
food,  or place or use any  inflammable,  combustible,  explosive  or  hazardous
fluid, chemical,  device,  substance or material in or about the Project without
the prior  written  consent of Lessor.  Lessee shall  comply with all  statutes,
ordinances,  rules, orders, regulations and requirements imposed by governmental
or  quasi-governmental  authorities in connection with fire and panic safety and
fire prevention and shall not commit any act, or permit any object to be brought
or kept in the  Project,  which  shall  result in a change of the  rating of the
Project by the Insurance Services Office or any similar person or entity. Lessee
shall not  commit  any act or permit  any  object to be  brought  or kept in the
Project  which shall  increase  the rate of fire  insurance on the Project or on
property located therein.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, Lessee may cook with a
microwave oven for personal use of its employees.

7.  Lessee  shall not conduct in or about the  Project  any  auction,  public or
private, without the prior written approval of Lessor.

8. Lessee  shall not install or use in the  Project any air  conditioning  unit,
engine,  boiler,  generator,  machinery,  heating  unit,  stove,  water  cooler,
ventilator,  radiator or any other similar  apparatus  without the express prior
written consent of Lessor, and then only as Lessor may direct.

9. All  equipment and any other device of any  electrical  or mechanical  nature
shall be placed by Lessee in the Premises in settings  approved by Lessor, so as
to absorb or prevent any vibration,  noise or annoyance.  Lessee shall not cause
improper noises, vibrations or odors within the Project.

10.  Lessee  shall not move or install  such  objects in or about the Project in
such a fashion as to unreasonably  obstruct the activities of other lessees, and
all such moving shall be at the sole expense, risk and responsibility of Lessee.

11.  Lessee  shall not place  within the  Project any safes,  copying  machines,
computer  equipment or other objects of unusual size or weight, nor shall Lessee
place   within  the  Project  any  objects   which   exceed  the  floor   weight
specifications  of the  Project  without the express  prior  written  consent of
Lessor.  The placement and  positioning  of all such objects  within the Project
shall be prescribed by Lessor and such objects  shall,  in all cases,  be placed
upon plates or footings of such size as shall be prescribed by Lessor.

12. Lessee shall not deposit trash, refuse,  cigarettes,  or other substances of
any kind within or out of the Project,  except in the refuse containers provided
therefor.  Lessee shall not introduce into the Project any substance which might
add an undue burden to the

                                Page 1 of 4 Pages


<PAGE>

cleaning or  maintenance  of the Premises or the Project.  Lessee shall exercise
its best  efforts to keep the  sidewalks,  entrances,  passages,  courts,  lobby
areas, garages or parking areas, elevators,  escalators,  stairways, vestibules,
public corridors and halls in and about the Project (hereinafter "Common Areas")
clean and free from rubbish.

13. Lessee shall use the Common Areas only as a means of ingress and egress, and
Lessee  shall  permit no loitering by any persons upon Common Areas or elsewhere
within the Project. The Common Areas and roof of the Project are not for the use
of the general public, and Lessor shall in all cases retain the right to control
or prevent  access  thereto by all persons  whose  presence,  in the judgment of
Lessor, shall be prejudicial to the safety,  character,  reputation or interests
of the Project and its lessees. Lessee shall not enter the mechanical rooms, air
conditioning rooms, electrical closets,  janitorial closets, or similar areas or
go upon the roof of the Project  without the express  prior  written  consent of
Lessor.

14.  Lessor  reserves  the right to exclude or expel from the Project any person
who, in the opinion of Lessor,  is  intoxicated or under the influence of liquor
or  drugs  or who  shall  in  any  manner  act in  violation  of the  rules  and
regulations of the Project.

15. Lessor shall have the right to designate the area or areas, if any, in which
Lessee  and  Lessee's  servants,   employees,   contractors,   jobbers,  agents,
licensees,  invitees,  guests and visitors may park vehicles, and Lessee and its
servants, employees,  contractors,  jobbers, agents, licensees, invitees, guests
and visitors and shall observe and comply with all driving and parking signs and
markers  within  and  about the  Project.  All  parking  ramps and areas and any
pedestrian walkways,  plazas or other public areas forming a part of the Project
or the land  upon  which the  Project  is  situated  shall be under the sole and
absolute  control of Lessor who shall have the  exclusive  right to regulate and
control those areas.

16. Lessee shall not use the washrooms,  restrooms, and plumbing fixtures of the
Project, and appurtenances  thereto, for any other purpose than the purposes for
which they were constructed,  and Lessee shall not waste water by interfering or
tampering  with the  faucets  or  otherwise.  If  Lessee or  Lessee's  servants,
employees, contractors, jobbers, agents, licensees, invitees, guests or visitors
cause  any  damage  to  such   washrooms,   restrooms,   plumbing   fixtures  or
appurtenances,  such damage  shall be repaired at Lessee's  expense,  and Lessor
shall not be responsible therefor.

17. Lessee shall not mark,  paint,  drill into, cut, string wires within,  or in
any way  deface any part of the  Project,  without  the  express  prior  written
consent  of  Lessor,  and as  Lessor  may  direct.  Upon  removal  of  any  wall
decorations or  installations  or floor  coverings by Lessee,  any damage to the
walls or floors  shall be repaired by Lessee at Lessee's  sole cost and expense.
Without  limitation upon any of the provisions of the Lease,  Lessee shall refer
all contractor's representatives,  installation technicians,  janitorial workers
and other mechanics,  artisans and laborers  rendering any service in connection
with the  repair,  maintenance  or  improvement  of the  Premises  to Lessor for
Lessor's  supervision,  approval  and  control  before  performance  of any such
service.  This  Paragraph  17 shall apply to all work  performed in the Project,
including  attachments and installations of any nature affecting floors,  walls,
woodwork,  trim,  windows,  ceilings,  equipment  or any  other  portion  of the
Project.  Plans and  specifications  for such work,  prepared at  Lessee's  sole
expense  shall be submitted  to Lessor and shall be subject to Lessor's  express
prior written  approval in each instance  before the  commencement  of work. All
installations,  alterations  and additions  shall be  constructed by Lessee in a
good and  workman-like  manner and only good grades of material shall be used in
connection therewith. The means by which telephone,  telegraph and similar wires
are to be introduced to the Premises and the location of telephones,  call boxes
and other  office  equipment  affixed  to the  Premises  shall be subject to the
express  prior  written  approval of Lessor.  The use of cement or other similar
adhesive material is expressly prohibited.

18. No signs,  awnings,  showcases,  advertising devices or other projections or
obstructions  shall be attached to the outside  walls of the Project or attached
or placed upon any Common Areas  without the express  prior  written  consent of
Lessor.  No window shades,  blinds,  drapes or other window  coverings  shall be
installed in the Project without the express prior written consent of Lessor. No
sign, picture,  advertisement,  window display or other public display or notice
shall be inscribed,  exhibited,  painted or affixed by Lessee upon or within any
part of the Premises in such a fashion as to be seen from the

                               Page 2 of 4 Pages


<PAGE>

outside of the Premises or the Project without the express prior written consent
of Lessor.  In the event of the  violation  of any of the  foregoing  by Lessee,
Lessor may remove the articles  constituting the violation without any liability
and Lessee shall reimburse  Lessor for the expense incurred in such removal upon
demand as additional rent under the Lease.  Interior signs on doors and upon the
Project  directory  shall be subject to the express  prior  written  approval of
Lessor and shall be  inscribed,  painted or affixed by Lessor at the  expense of
Lessee.

19.  Lessee  shall not use the name of the Project or of Lessor in its  business
name,  trademarks,  signs,  advertisements,  descriptive  material,  letterhead,
insignia or any other  similar  item  without  Lessor's  express  prior  written
consent.

20.  Lessee shall be entitled to have its name entered upon the directory of the
Project.  In the event that Lessee wishes to have  additional  entries made upon
the Project  directory  for the names of employees  of Lessee who occupy  office
space  within  the  Premises,  such  entries  may be  allowed  by  Lessor in its
reasonable  discretion,  and Lessor may require that Lessee pay a reasonable fee
for each such additional  entry. All entries upon the Project directory shall be
in uniform print of a size, style and format selected by Lessor.

21. The sashes, sash doors,  skylights,  windows and doors that reflect or admit
light or air into the Common Areas shall not be covered or obstructed by Lessee,
through  placement  of objects  upon window  sills or  otherwise.  Lessee  shall
cooperate with Lessor in obtaining  maximum  effectiveness of the cooling system
of the Project by closing drapes and other window  coverings when the sun's rays
fall upon windows of the Premises.  Lessee shall not obstruct,  alter, or in any
way impair  the  efficient  operation  of  Lessor's  heating,  ventilating,  air
conditioning,  electrical,  fire, safety or lighting  systems,  nor shall Lessee
tamper  with or change the  setting of any  thermostat  or  temperature  control
valves in the Project.

22. Subject to applicable  fire or other safety  regulations,  all doors opening
onto Common Areas and all doors upon the perimeter of the Premises shall be kept
closed and, during non-business hours, locked, except when in use for ingress or
egress.  If  Lessee  uses  the  Premises  after  regular  business  hours  or on
non-business days, Lessee shall lock any entrance doors to the Project or to the
Premises used by Lessee immediately after using such doors.

23.  Employees of Lessor shall not receive or carry messages for or to Lessee or
any other  person,  nor contract with nor render free or paid services to Lessee
or  Lessee's  servants,  employees,   contractors,  jobbers,  agents,  invitees,
licensees,  guests or  visitors.  In the event  that any of  Lessor's  employees
perform any such services,  such  employees  shall be deemed to be the agents of
Lessee  regardless  of whether or how payment is arranged for such  services and
Lessee hereby  indemnifies  and holds Lessor harmless from any and all liability
in  connection  with any such  services and any  associated  injury or damage to
property or injury or death to persons resulting therefrom.

24. All keys to the exterior  doors of the Premises  shall be obtained by Lessee
from Lessor,  and Lessee shall pay to Lessor a reasonable  deposit determined by
Lessor from time to time for such keys.  Lessee shall not make duplicate  copies
of such keys.  Lessee  shall not install  additional  locks or bolts of any kind
upon any of the doors or windows of, or within,  the  Project,  nor shall Lessee
make any changes in existing locks or the mechanisms thereof. Lessee shall, upon
the  termination  of its tenancy,  provide Lessor with the  combinations  to all
combination  locks on safes,  safe cabinets and vaults and deliver to Lessor all
keys to the Project, the Premises,  and all interior doors,  cabinets, and other
key- controlled  mechanisms therein,  whether or not such keys were furnished to
Lessee by  Lessor.  In the event of the loss of any key  furnished  to Lessee by
Lessor, Lessee shall pay to Lessor the cost of replacing the same or of changing
the lock or locks  opened by such last key if Lessor  shall deem it necessary to
make such a change.

25.  Access may be had by Lessee to the Common  Areas and to the Premises at any
time.  At other times  access to the  Project  may be refused  unless the person
seeking  admission is known to the watchman in charge, if any, and/or has a pass
or is properly identified.  Lessee shall be responsible for all persons for whom
Lessee  requests  passes  and shall be  liable  to  Lessor  for all acts of such
persons.  Lessor  shall in no case be liable for  damages for the  admission  or
exclusion of any person from the Project. In case of

                                Page 3 of 4 Pages


<PAGE>

invasion, mob, riot, public excitement, or other commotion,  Lessor reserves the
right to prevent  access to the Project for the safety of lessees and protection
of property in the Project.

26. Lessor shall not be responsible for, and Lessee hereby indemnifies and holds
Lessor  harmless  from any  liability  in  connection  with,  the  loss,  theft,
misappropriation  or other  disappearance of furniture,  furnishings,  fixtures,
machinery,  equipment,  money,  jewelry or other items of personal property from
the Premises or other parts of the Project,  regardless  of whether the Premises
or Project are locked at the time of such loss.

27. For purposes hereof, the terms "Lessor",  "Lessee", "Project" and "Premises"
are  defined as those  terms are  defined in the Lease to which  these Rules and
Regulations  are attached.  Wherever  Lessee is obligated  under these Rules and
Regulations to do or refrain from doing an act or thing,  such obligation  shall
include the  exercise by Lessee of its best  efforts to secure  compliance  with
such  obligation  by the  servants,  employees,  contractors,  jobbers,  agents,
invitees,  licensees,  guests and visitors of Lessee.  The term "Project"  shall
include the Premises, and any obligations of Lessee hereunder with regard to the
Project  shall apply with equal force to the  Premises and to other parts of the
Project.

                                Page 4 of 4 Pages


<PAGE>

                                   EXHIBIT "F"

                               Storage and Use of
                       Permitted Hazardous Material/Wastes



Landlord   will  allow  the  use  and   storage  of  the   following   hazardous
materials/wastes  at the Premises,  so long as Tenant complies with all terms of
the Lease regarding Hazardous Materials:


                                Isopropyl Alcohol
                                   Solder Flux
                                      Wipes
                                      Tips
                                     Gloves
                                   Finger Cots


                  and such other  Hazardous  Material  required  and used in the
                  production  of  Tenant's  Products,  provided  their  use  and
                  disposal adheres to federal and state laws.





                            FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE



         THIS FIRST AMENDMENT TO LEASE (the  "Amendment"),  dated as of February
12,  1998,  is entered  into by and  between  Stanford  Ranch I, LLC, a Delaware
limited liability company ("Landlord"),  and Spectrian  Corporation,  a Delaware
corporation ("Tenant"),  and is made with reference to the following recitals of
fact:

                                    RECITALS

         A. Landlord and Tenant  entered into that certain Lease dated  December
19, 1997 (the  "Lease"),  for certain  office space  commonly known as Suite 500
(referred  to in the  Lease as the  "Premises"  and  referred  to  herein as the
"Original  Premises") in a building (the  "Building")  containing  approximately
40,000  square feet to be  constructed  within  Atherton  Tech  Center,  Lot 10,
Rocklin, California 95765 (the "Project"). The Lease includes the First Addendum
to Lease dated December 19, 1997 (the "First Addendum").

         B. Tenant  agrees to lease from  Landlord  additional  space within the
Building and otherwise  modify the Lease on all of the terms and  conditions set
forth herein.

                                    AGREEMENT

         NOW,  THEREFORE,  in consideration  of the mutual  covenants  contained
herein and for other  valuable  consideration,  the receipt and  sufficiency  of
which is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto do hereby agree as follows:

         1.       Lease of Additional Space.

                  (a)  Additional  Space.  As of  the  Term  Commencement  Date,
Landlord hereby leases to Tenant,  and Tenant hereby leases from Landlord,  that
certain  space in the  Building  depicted  on the Amended  Exhibit "A"  attached
hereto and incorporated  herein by this reference (the "Additional  Space"),  on
all of the terms, provisions and conditions of the Lease as modified hereby. The
Amended Exhibit "A" also depicts the Original Premises,  and the Amended Exhibit
"A"  shall  supersede  and  replace  Exhibit  "A"  attached  to the  Lease.  The
Additional Space contains  approximately 19,142 square feet, and such Additional
Space and the Original Premises together  constitute the entire Building.  As of
the Term  Commencement  Date, the term "Premises," as used in the Lease and this
Amendment,  shall be modified to mean the Original  Premises and the  Additional
Space.

                  (b) Term for  Additional  Space.  The Term of the  Lease  with
respect  to the  Additional  Space  shall  commence  on the  date on  which  the
conditions  set forth in  Section 2B of the Lease  have been  satisfied  as they
relate to the Additional  Space. The parties hereto  anticipate that the Term of
the Lease relating to the Additional  Space will occur on the Term  Commencement
Date. As such,  the  provisions of this  Amendment  pertaining to the Additional
Space  reflect  commencement  of  obligations  thereto  occurring  on  the  Term
Commencement Date.  However, if the Tenant Improvements for the Additional Space
are  not  substantially   completed  by  the  Term   Commencement   Date,  then,
notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, the Term of the Lease
as it relates to the Additional Space shall commence upon substantial completion
of the Tenant  Improvements for the Additional Space and delivery to Tenant of a
copy of a temporary  or  permanent  occupancy  permit for the  Additional  Space
(sometimes referred to herein as the "Additional Space Commencement  Date"). The
term "Tenant  Improvements for the Additional Space" shall mean the improvements
depicted on the Schematic  Drawing  prepared by  Calpo/Hom/Macaulay/Dong,  dated
February 12, 1998, a copy of which is attached hereto as the Amended Exhibit "A"
(sometimes  also referred to herein as the "Schematic  Drawing").  The Lease for
the entire Premises (i.e., the Original Premises and the Additional Space) shall
be  coterminous,  such that the Term of the Lease with respect to the Additional
Space  shall end on the  expiration  or earlier  termination  of the Term of the
Lease with respect to the Original Premises, as it may be extended or renewed.

                  (c)  Base  Rent  for   Additional   Space.   As  of  the  Term
Commencement Date, the Base Rent for the Additional Space shall be as follows:

                           (i) The Base Rent for the first two (2) months  after
the Term Commencement  Date shall be fully abated.  For the period following the
first two (2) months of the abated  Base Rent  through  the next 9 months of the
Term  (the day  after the last day of the last of such  months  is  referred  to
herein as the  "Additional  Space  Base Rent  Increase  Date"),  subject  to the
provisions of Section  1(c)(iii) below, Base Rent for the Additional Space shall
be $8,613.90 per month ($0.45 per square foot of the Additional Space per month)
(it is understood that, if the Additional Space  Commencement  Date occurs after
the Term  Commencement  Date,  the first two months after the  Additional  Space
Commencement Date shall be free of Base Rent for the Additional Space);



<PAGE>
                           (ii) From the  Additional  Space  Base Rent  Increase
Date through the end of the Term,  Base Rent for the  Additional  Space shall be
$16,270.70 per month ($0.85 per square foot of the  Additional  Space per month)
(sometimes  referred to herein as the  "Increased  Base Rent for the  Additional
Space");

                           (iii) The  Additional  Space Base Rent  Increase Date
shall be  lengthened or shortened to the extent the  Construction  Costs for the
Additional Space are less or greater,  respectively,  than Landlord's Additional
Construction Allowance (as defined in Section 1(g) below);

                           (iv) Base Rent for the  Additional  Space (i.e.,  the
initial Base Rent and the Increased Base Rent for the Additional Space) shall be
added  to the Base  Rent for the  Original  Premises  (as the Base  Rent for the
Original  Premises  may  be  increased  to the  extent  the  Tenant  Improvement
Allowance is greater than the Fixed  Allowance,  as provided in Section 5 of the
First  Addendum),  and the combined Base Rent for the  Additional  Space and the
Original  Premises  shall be the Base  Rent for the  entire  Premises  under the
Lease;

                           (v) The  combined  Base Rent for the entire  Premises
shall be  increased  on the 19th,  37th and 54th months of the Term of the Lease
(as calculated from the Term  Commencement  Date) by three and one-half  percent
(3-1/2%) of the then existing combined Base Rent (as it may have been previously
increased). If the Increased Base Rent for the Additional Space is not effective
on the 19th month of the Term,  then the Increased  Base Rent for the Additional
Space shall be deemed to be effective for purposes of  calculating  the increase
in  Base  Rent  for  the  19th  month  of  the  Term.  If the  Additional  Space
Commencement  Date occurs more than sixty (60) days after the Term  Commencement
Date, then the three and one-half  percent  (3-1/2%)  increases in Base Rent for
the  Additional  Space shall be delayed by the number of days following the Term
Commencement Date until the Additional Space  Commencement Date;  however,  this
delay shall not affect the occurrence of the three and one-half percent (3-1/2%)
increases in Base Rent for the Original Premises as described above.

                  (d) Tenant's  Proportionate Share. As of the Term Commencement
Date, Tenant's  Proportionate Share, as set forth in the Basic Lease Information
of the Lease,  shall be increased to 100%,  since,  as of the Term  Commencement
Date, Tenant shall be leasing the entire Building.

                  (e) Parking  Density.  As of the Term  Commencement  Date, the
number of parking spaces available for use by Tenant shall be modified to be all
of the parking spaces located on the Project.

                  (f) Tenant  Improvements for Additional Space.  Landlord shall
alter and improve the Additional Space with the Tenant  Improvements as depicted
in the Schematic  Drawing and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
Lease  (including,  without  limitation,  all  attachments  thereto);  provided,
however,  that for purposes of determining the scope of the parties' obligations
with respect to the Tenant  Improvements for the Additional Space, the following
shall apply:

                           (i) Landlord  shall act  reasonably and diligently in
the commencement and substantial  completion of the Tenant  Improvements for the
Additional  Space,  and  Tenant  shall act  reasonably  and  cooperatively  with
Landlord to enable the substantial completion of the Tenant Improvements for the
Additional Space to occur at the earliest date  practicable.  The first sentence
of Section  2.2 of the Work Letter  attached as Exhibit "B" to the Lease  (i.e.,
the Commencement Date shall occur by June 1, 1998) shall,  subject to Section 35
of the Lease, be applicable to the Tenant Improvements for the Original Premises
and the Additional Space. In no event, subject to Section 35 of the Lease, shall
the Additional Space Commencement Date occur later than December 31, 1998.

                           (ii) The following  provisions of the Lease shall not
be applicable to the construction of the Tenant  Improvements for the Additional
Space:  (i) the last sentence of Section 1 of the Work Letter and (ii) Section 5
of the First Addendum.

                           (iii)  References  in the Lease  (including,  without
limitation,  the Work Letter) to the Tenant  Improvements  shall mean the Tenant
Improvements for the Additional  Space, and references to the Commencement  Date
shall mean the Term Commencement Date.

If  Tenant  wishes  to make  any  changes  to the  Tenant  Improvements  for the
Additional Space from those depicted on the Schematic Drawing,  and such changes
are  approved  in  writing  by  Landlord   (Landlord's  approval  shall  not  be
unreasonably  withheld,  except  that  Landlord's  approval  may be  withheld in
Landlord's  sole  discretion  as to any changes  which  materially  diminish the
construction  costs of the Tenant  Improvements  for the Additional  Space below
$17.00 per square foot),  then Tenant shall bear the entire cost of such changes
(including,  without  limitation,  all architectural fees and costs, permit fees
and  cost  and  all  additional  costs  to  construct  and  install  the  Tenant
Improvements  for the Additional  Space  [including the 4%  construction  fee to
Landlord]  related to such changes),  and the date of substantial  completion of
the  Tenant  Improvements  for the  Additional  Space  shall be  deemed  to have
occurred on the date same would have occurred but for such changes. The costs of
such  changes  that are to be borne by Tenant  shall be paid by  shortening  the
Additional Space Base Rent Increase Date as described in Section 1(g) below.

                                        2
<PAGE>
                  (g) Payment of  Construction  Costs.  Landlord's  construction
allowance  for  the  Tenant  Improvements  for the  Additional  Space  shall  be
$339,210.00  ($17.67  per  square  foot of the  Additional  Space)  ("Landlord's
Additional Construction  Allowance"),  based upon construction costs of $______,
plus a construction fee to Landlord of 4% of such costs pertaining to the Tenant
Improvements  for the  Additional  Space (which  Tenant  Improvements  shall not
include the Landlord's Work  (Landlord's Work shall be all work for the Building
that is not Tenant  Improvements,  whether such Tenant  Improvements  are to the
Original Premises or the Additional  Space], but shall include the architectural
fees and costs of Calpo/Hom/Macaulay/Dong  for the Project). It is intended that
the monthly Base Rent shall not be increased if the increase in the construction
costs is simply because  construction costs for the Tenant  Improvements for the
Additional Space were higher than expected,  and the monthly Base Rent shall not
be decreased  if there is a decrease in the  construction  costs simply  because
construction  costs for the Tenant  Improvements  for the Additional  Space were
lower than expected.  In the event the actual  construction  costs of the Tenant
Improvements  for  the  Additional  Space  exceeds  or is less  than  Landlord's
Additional  Construction  Allowance  solely due to Tenant  changes in the Tenant
Improvements  for  the  Additional   Space,   Landlord  shall  pay  such  actual
construction costs; provided,  however, that there shall be an adjustment in the
occurrence of the  Additional  Space Base Rent Increase Date (either to lengthen
or  shorten  the time  period  before  which  the  Increased  Base  Rent for the
Additional Space becomes effective and payable) as follows:

                           (i) If the actual  Construction  Costs for the Tenant
Improvements  for the Additional  Space are greater than  Landlord's  Additional
Construction  Allowance due solely to Tenant's changes,  then the amount of such
excess  shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord in the form of a  shortening  of the
time period  before which the  Additional  Space Base Rent Increase Date occurs.
For example,  if such excess is $30,000.00,  then the Additional Space Base Rent
Increase  Date shall occur sooner by four (4) months (and the $627.20  remainder
shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord as additional  Base Rent for the  Additional
Space in the month preceding the Additional Space Base Rent Increase Date).

                           (ii) Alternatively,  if the actual Construction Costs
for the Tenant  Improvements  for the Additional  Space are less than Landlord's
Additional  Construction  Allowance  due solely to  Tenant's  changes,  then the
shortfall shall be recaptured by Tenant in the form of a lengthening of the time
period before which the  Additional  Space Base Rent  Increase Date occurs.  For
example,  if the shortfall is $30,000.00,  then the  Additional  Space Base Rent
Increase  Date shall occur  later by four (4) months (and the $627.20  remainder
shall be a credit against the Base Rent for the Additional Space in the month in
which the Additional Space Base Rent Increase Date occurs).

                           (iii)   Notwithstanding   anything  to  the  contrary
contained in this Section 1(g),  if as a result of Tenant  changes in the Tenant
Improvements for the Additional  Space,  the  construction  costs for the Tenant
Improvements for the Additional Space exceed $406,001.82 ($21.21 per square foot
of the  Additional  Space),  then Tenant  shall pay the excess costs to Landlord
within ten (10) days after written  request  therefor from Landlord,  and in any
event prior to the date Landlord incurs such costs.

                  (h) Evidence of Insurance  Coverage.  On the Term Commencement
Date, Tenant shall cause the insurance which Tenant is obligated to obtain under
the Lease to be revised such that it shall also be  applicable  to and cover the
Original  Premises  and  the  Additional  Space,  and  Tenant  shall  deliver  a
Certificate of Insurance therefor to Landlord on the Term Commencement Date.

         2. Exercise of Right of First Refusal.  The execution of this Amendment
shall be considered as Tenant's exercise of its First Refusal Right contained in
Paragraph  3 of the First  Addendum.  Therefore,  said  Paragraph 3 of the First
Addendum is hereby  deleted in its entirety  and shall have no further  force or
effect.  Furthermore, as a result of the exercise by Tenant of its First Refusal
Right, same automatically  terminated Tenant's Cancellation Option, and as such,
Paragraph 4 of the First  Addendum is also hereby  deleted in its  entirety  and
shall have no further force or effect.

         3. Tenant Estoppel  Statement.  Tenant hereby certifies and agrees that
the Lease is in full force and  effect,  Landlord  is not  currently  in default
under the Lease, and, to the best of Tenant's  knowledge,  no event has occurred
which,  with the giving of notice or the passage of time,  or both,  would ripen
into Landlord's  default under the Lease.  Tenant further  acknowledges that the
Lease  has not been  modified  or  amended  in any way prior to the date of this
Amendment.

         4. Defined Terms;  Captions.  All terms in this Amendment not otherwise
defined herein shall have the same  definitions as are provided  therefor in the
Lease. The captions used in this Amendment are for convenience of reference only
and shall have no effect upon the interpretation of this Amendment.

         5.  Authorization  to Sign.  Landlord  and Tenant  hereby  warrant  and
represent  to each other that the persons  signing the Lease and this  Amendment
have the authority to sign such  documents on behalf of such party and that such
documents  are binding  upon such party in  accordance  with their  terms.  Upon
request  by either  party  hereto,  the other  party  shall  provide  reasonable
evidence of the authority of the signatories on its behalf to the Lease and this
Amendment.

                                        3
<PAGE>
         6.  Ratification  of Lease.  Except as  expressly  amended and modified
herein,  the Lease shall remain in full force and effect and, as hereby amended,
is ratified  and  confirmed  by the parties  hereto.  In the event of a conflict
between the provisions of this Amendment and those of the Lease,  the provisions
of this Amendment shall control.

         7.  Brokers.  The  provisions of Paragraph 36 of the Lease dealing with
the  brokerage  commission  payable  to  Cornish  &  Carey  Commercial  and  the
representation, warranty and indemnity by Tenant contained therein shall also be
applicable to the lease of the Additional Space.

         IN WITNESS WHEREOF,  the parties hereto have executed this Amendment as
of the date first set forth above.

"LANDLORD"                                    "TENANT"

STANFORD RANCH I, LLC,                        SPECTRIAN CORPORATION,
a Delaware limited liability company          a Delaware corporation


By: ______________________________            By: ______________________________

    Name:_________________________                Name:_________________________

    Title:________________________                Title:________________________




By: ______________________________            By: ______________________________

    Name:_______________________                  Name:_________________________

    Title:______________________                  Title:________________________


                                        4


<PAGE>


                               AMENDED EXHIBIT "A"


        SCHEMATIC DRAWING SHOWING ORIGINAL PREMISES AND ADDITIONAL SPACE


                                [TO BE ATTACHED]


                                        5




                        CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS

The Board of Directors and Stockholders
Spectrian Corporation:

We consent to incorporation  by reference in the  registration  statements (Nos.
333-38561,  333-25435,  333-49081,  and  333-53079)  on  Form  S-8 of  Spectrian
Corporation  of our report  dated April 22, 1998,  relating to the  consolidated
balance sheets of Spectrian  Corporation  and  subsidiaries as of March 31, 1998
and 1997, and the related consolidated  statements of operations,  stockholders'
equity,  and cash  flows for each of the years in the  three-year  period  ended
March 31, 1998, and the related schedule,  which report appears in the March 31,
1998, annual report on Form 10-K of Spectrian Corporation.

                                   /s/ KPMG Peat Marwick LLP

Mountain View, California
May 19, 1998


<TABLE> <S> <C>


<ARTICLE>                     5
<CIK>                         0000925054
<NAME>                        SPECTRIAN CORP /DE/
<MULTIPLIER>                                   1,000
       
<S>                             <C>
<PERIOD-TYPE>                   12-MOS
<FISCAL-YEAR-END>                              MAR-31-1998
<PERIOD-START>                                 APR-01-1997
<PERIOD-END>                                   MAR-31-1998
<CASH>                                           31,460
<SECURITIES>                                     68,128
<RECEIVABLES>                                    21,499
<ALLOWANCES>                                        376
<INVENTORY>                                      15,362
<CURRENT-ASSETS>                                  6,202
<PP&E>                                           56,935
<DEPRECIATION>                                   24,159
<TOTAL-ASSETS>                                  175,051
<CURRENT-LIABILITIES>                            24,797
<BONDS>                                           5,912
                                 0
                                           0
<COMMON>                                        146,228
<OTHER-SE>                                       (1,886)
<TOTAL-LIABILITY-AND-EQUITY>                    175,051
<SALES>                                         168,798
<TOTAL-REVENUES>                                168,798
<CGS>                                           132,684
<TOTAL-COSTS>                                   132,684
<OTHER-EXPENSES>                                 31,658
<LOSS-PROVISION>                                      0
<INTEREST-EXPENSE>                               (4,865)
<INCOME-PRETAX>                                   9,321
<INCOME-TAX>                                        399
<INCOME-CONTINUING>                               8,922
<DISCONTINUED>                                        0
<EXTRAORDINARY>                                       0
<CHANGES>                                             0
<NET-INCOME>                                      8,922
<EPS-PRIMARY>                                      0.90
<EPS-DILUTED>                                      0.83
                                               


</TABLE>


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission